Garmin | G500H | Garmin G500H G500H Pilot's Guide

Garmin G500H G500H Pilot's Guide
G500H
Pilot's Guide
© 2010-2019 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written
permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of
any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal
use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text
of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual
or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. GDU™
and SVT™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without
the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications; Sirius, XM, and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.; Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium
Communications Inc.; Canadian radar data provided by Environment Canada; United States radar data
provided by NOAA; European radar data collected and provided by Meteo France.
This part shall comply with Garmin Banned and Restricted Substances document, P/N 001-00211-00.
Visit flyGarmin.com for aviation product support.
URL: https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/support/
Visit Garmin’s website for aviation limited warranty information.
URL: https://www.garmin.com/en-US/legal/aviation-limited-warranty
March 2019
Printed in the U.S.A.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: The Garmin G500H has a very high degree of functional
integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/
or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical.
Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur
without a fault indication shown by the G500H. It is thus the responsibility
of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with
all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
Sec 1
System
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory
in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts
for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
Foreword
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated
upon the use of the terrain function. The G500H Terrain Proximity feature
is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of
surroundings during flight. The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used
as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications
requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained
from third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the
accuracy of the terrain data.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used
in the G500H system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that
the information remains current. Pilots using an outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
i
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Appendix A
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for
primary navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other
approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
Sec 7
Symbols
WARNING: The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height
above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude
displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the output from the GDC 74H Air
Data Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never
be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by
the G500H PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
Foreword
WARNING: Traffic information shown on the G500H Multi Function Display
is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic. Pilots must maneuver
the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition
of conflicting traffic.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: For safety reasons, G500H operational procedures must be
learned on the ground.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and
understand all aspects of the G500H Pilot’s Guide. Thoroughly practice basic
operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare
indications from the G500H to all available navigation sources, including
the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety
purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
Sec 8
Glossary
WARNING: Never use the G500H to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm.
Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Airman’s
Information Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any
thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense radar echo.”
Index
Appendix A
WARNING: With a GRS 77/GDC 74 installation, exceeding 200° per
second in pitch or roll may invalidate AHRS attitude provided to the
GDU 620. Exceeding 450 KIAS may invalidate ADC information provided to the
GDU 620. With a GSU 75/GRS 79/GDC 72 installation, exceeding 225°
per second in pitch or roll may invalidate AHRS attitude provided to the
GDU 620. Exceeding 435 KIAS may invalidate ADC information provided
to the GDU 620.
ii
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning
System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The
GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G500H utilize
GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as
with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G500H can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
FIS-B information, including, weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR
areas, are intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long- and nearterm planning decision making. The system lacks sufficient resolution and
updating capability necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with
immediate decisions.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
-To cue the pilot to communicate with theAirTraffic Control controller, Flight Service
Station specialist, operator dispatch, or airline operations control center for general
and mission critical meteorological information, NAS status conditions, or both.
Sec 3
MFD
- To promote pilot awareness of own ship location with respect to reported
weather, including hazardous meteorological conditions, NAS status indicators,
and enhance pilot planning decisions and pilot near-term decision-making.
Sec 2
PFD
CAUTION: FIS-B information is to be used for pilot planning
decisions and pilot near-term decisions focused on avoiding areas
of inclement weather that are beyond visual range or where poor
visibility precludes visual acquisition of inclement weather. FIS-B
weather and NAS status information may be used as follows:
Sec 1
System
WARNING: Because of anomalies in the earth’s magnetic field, operating
the G500H within the following areas could result in loss of reliable
attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude and south
of 70° South latitude. An area north of 65° North latitude and between
longitude 75° West and 120° West. An area north of 70° North latitude and
between longitude 70° West and 128° West. An area north of 70° North
latitude and between longitude 85° East and 114° East. An area south of
55° South latitude between longitude 120° East and 165° East.
Foreword
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-HSVT information for primary terrain
avoidance. Terrain-HSVT is intended only to enhance situational awareness.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
iii
Foreword
CAUTION: The Garmin G500H does not contain any user-serviceable parts.
Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
CAUTION: The G500H PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a
special anti-reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and
abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a
clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe
for anti-reflective coatings.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars
can cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the
aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet away
from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR information through
official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater
than 75° North or 60° South.
Appendix A
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive
harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please
refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
Index
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including
screen images of the G500H bezel and displays, are subject to change and
may not reflect the most current G500H system. Depictions of equipment
may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
iv
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, or Chartview functions as the basis
for ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and Chartview functions
have not been qualified to be used as an airport moving map display
(AMMD). SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and Chartview are intended to improve
pilot situational awareness during ground operations and should only be
used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface.
Foreword
NOTE: Terrain-HSVT is standard when the Garmin Synthetic Vision
Technology (SVT) option is installed.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
v
Foreword
Record of Revisions
Date
03/2018
10/2018
10/2016
10/2015
03/2015
02/2015
01/2012
12/2011
08/2011
11/2010
04/2010
01/2010
Description
Update reflects software v7.36 upgrade.
Update reflects software v7.30 upgrade.
Update reflects software v7.12 upgrade.
Update reflects software v7.01 upgrade.
Added chart information.
Update reflects software v7.00 upgrade.
Revised additional feature information in section 5.
Revised obstacle description on page A-4.
Update reflects software v6.00 upgrade.
Update reflects software v4.00 and v5.00 upgrades.
Added speed tape marking information.
Product release.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Revision
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
vi
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
AOPA Airport Directory
AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS, INC. AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS
(HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY "AOPA") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, WITH
RESPECT TO THE AOPA INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS
IS” AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING
ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES
INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. USER
AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO
RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS OR
LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
vii
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Contents
1
System Overview..................................................................................1-1
1.1 System Description................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1
Standard System Line Replaceable Units................................. 1-3
1.1.2
Optional Line Replaceable Units............................................. 1-9
1.2 System Power Up................................................................................. 1-13
1.3 International Geomagnetic Reference Field........................................... 1-15
1.4 System Operation................................................................................. 1-16
1.4.1
Pilot Controls....................................................................... 1-16
1.4.2
Using the Soft Key Controls.................................................. 1-20
1.4.3
Using the Page Menus.......................................................... 1-20
1.4.4
System Settings.................................................................... 1-22
1.4.5
Display Backlighting............................................................. 1-25
2
Primary Flight Display...........................................................................2-1
2.1 PFD Soft Keys......................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Airspeed Indicator.................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1
Markings................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.2
Reference Speeds................................................................... 2-8
2.3 Attitude Indicator................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.1
Extreme Attitude.................................................................. 2-11
2.4 Altimeter............................................................................................. 2-13
2.4.1
Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter...................................... 2-13
2.4.2
Altitude Alerting................................................................... 2-14
2.4.3
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Altitude Constraints (Software v7.30
or Later) 2-15
2.4.4
Changing Barometric Setting................................................ 2-16
2.4.5
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting.............. 2-16
2.5 Vertical Speed Indicator........................................................................ 2-19
2.5.1
Setting the Vertical Speed Indicator Bug................................ 2-20
2.6 Horizontal Situation Indicator............................................................... 2-21
2.6.1
Setting the Heading Bug....................................................... 2-22
2.6.2
Turn Rate Indicator............................................................... 2-23
2.7 Course Deviation Indicator................................................................... 2-24
2.7.1
CDI/VDI Preview................................................................... 2-24
2.7.2
Changing CDI Sources.......................................................... 2-25
viii
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
ix
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
3.1 Navigation Map Pages........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1
Default Navigation Map Page................................................. 3-3
3.1.2
Map Overlay Icons.................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3
Selecting Page Options........................................................... 3-4
3.1.4
Changing the Navigation Map Range..................................... 3-4
3.1.5
Decluttering Map Pages.......................................................... 3-4
3.1.6
Panning................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.7
Selecting Items on the Map.................................................... 3-6
3.1.8
Measuring Distances.............................................................. 3-7
3.1.9
Customizing Navigation Map Pages........................................ 3-8
3.1.10
Map Setup............................................................................. 3-8
3.1.11
Split Screen (Optional).......................................................... 3-26
3.2 Aux Mode Pages.................................................................................. 3-27
3.2.1
System Settings.................................................................... 3-27
3.2.2
SiriusXM Information (Optional)............................................ 3-39
3.2.3
SiriusXM Entertainment Radio (Optional).............................. 3-40
3.2.4
System Status....................................................................... 3-41
3.2.5
ADS-B/FIS-B Status (Optional)............................................... 3-48
3.2.6
External Video (Optional)...................................................... 3-49
3.2.7
Position Reporting (Optional)................................................ 3-54
3.2.8
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)....................................... 3-57
3.3 Flight Plan Pages................................................................................. 3-65
3.3.1
Active Flight Plan Page......................................................... 3-65
Sec 2
PFD
MultI-Function Display..........................................................................3-1
Sec 1
System
3
Foreword
2.7.3
Changing CDI Course........................................................... 2-26
2.7.4
Vertical Deviation Indicator................................................... 2-26
2.7.5
Auto-Slewing....................................................................... 2-28
2.8 Supplemental Flight Data..................................................................... 2-31
2.8.1
Bearing Pointers................................................................... 2-31
2.8.2
Temperature Display............................................................. 2-32
2.8.3
Wind Vectors........................................................................ 2-33
2.8.4
DME Indication.................................................................... 2-33
2.8.5
Marker Beacon Annunciations.............................................. 2-34
2.8.6
Miscompare Annunciations................................................... 2-34
2.9 Attitude Sync....................................................................................... 2-36
2.10 Radar Altimeter.................................................................................... 2-37
2.11 PFD Units............................................................................................ 2-40
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
3.3.2
3.3.3
4
Waypoint Information Page.................................................. 3-68
Charts Page (Optional)......................................................... 3-75
Hazard Avoidance.................................................................................4-1
4.1 Terrain Configurations............................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1
Terrain System Self-Test.......................................................... 4-3
4.2 Terrain Proximity.................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1
Terrain Proximity Limitations................................................... 4-5
4.2.2
Terrain System Status.............................................................. 4-5
4.2.3
Displaying Terrain Proximity.................................................... 4-6
4.2.4
Terrain Proximity Symbols....................................................... 4-9
4.3 External H-TAWS.................................................................................. 4-12
4.4 Terrain-HSVT (Optional)........................................................................ 4-13
4.4.1
Terrain-HSVT Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings........................... 4-14
4.4.2
Terrain-HSVT Page Aviation Data.......................................... 4-15
4.4.3
Inhibiting/Enabling Terrain-HSVT Alerting.............................. 4-16
4.4.4
Terrain-HSVT Reduced Protection Mode................................ 4-17
4.4.5
Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations.............................. 4-19
4.4.6
Mute Caution Alerts............................................................. 4-21
4.4.7
SVT Alerts when Terrain is Inhibited....................................... 4-22
4.5 Traffic Systems..................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.1
TAS/TCAS 1 Traffic (Optional)................................................ 4-23
4.5.2
TIS Traffic (Optional)............................................................. 4-30
4.5.3
ADS-B Traffic (Optional)........................................................ 4-38
4.6 XM WX Satellite Weather (Optional)..................................................... 4-44
4.6.1
Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products.............................. 4-44
4.6.2
Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map.................... 4-45
4.6.3
XM Weather Symbols and Product Age................................. 4-47
4.6.4
XM Weather Legends........................................................... 4-49
4.6.5
XM NEXRAD........................................................................ 4-51
4.6.6
XM Weather Page Map Orientation....................................... 4-54
4.6.7
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range............................................... 4-55
4.6.8
NEXRAD Legend.................................................................. 4-56
4.6.9
NEXRAD Source................................................................... 4-57
4.6.10
XM Echo Tops...................................................................... 4-58
4.6.11
XM Cloud Tops..................................................................... 4-60
4.6.12
XM WX Satellite Lightning.................................................... 4-62
4.6.13
XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs................................................... 4-63
x
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
xi
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
5.1 FliteCharts and ChartView...................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1
ChartView (Optional).............................................................. 5-3
Sec 2
PFD
Additional Features (Optional).............................................................5-1
Sec 1
System
5
Foreword
4.6.14
XM PIREPs........................................................................... 4-65
4.6.15
XM METARs......................................................................... 4-66
4.6.16
XM Winds Aloft.................................................................... 4-68
4.6.17
XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast.................................. 4-70
4.6.18
XM County Warnings............................................................ 4-72
4.6.19
XM TFRs............................................................................... 4-73
4.6.20
XM Cell Movement............................................................... 4-75
4.6.21
XM AIREPs........................................................................... 4-77
4.6.22
XM Cyclone.......................................................................... 4-79
4.6.23
XM Freezing Level................................................................ 4-80
4.6.24
XM Icing.............................................................................. 4-81
4.6.25
XM Turbulence..................................................................... 4-82
4.7 Garmin Connext Satellite Services (Optional)........................................ 4-83
4.7.1
Connext Weather Registration.............................................. 4-84
4.7.2
Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products................................. 4-86
4.7.3
Customizing the Weather Map.............................................. 4-86
4.7.4
GFDS Data Request.............................................................. 4-88
4.7.5
Weather Page Map Orientation............................................. 4-94
4.7.6
Precipitation Data Viewing Range......................................... 4-95
4.7.7
PRECIP Legend..................................................................... 4-96
4.7.8
GFDS Infrared Satellite Data Viewing Range.......................... 4-97
4.7.9
Data Link Lightning Data Viewing Range............................... 4-98
4.7.10
SIGMETs and AIRMETs......................................................... 4-99
4.7.11
AIREP/PIREP....................................................................... 4-101
4.7.12
METARs............................................................................. 4-103
4.7.13
Winds Aloft........................................................................ 4-106
4.7.14
GFDS TFRs.......................................................................... 4-108
4.8 FIS-B Weather (Optional).................................................................... 4-109
4.8.1
NEXRAD Abnormalities....................................................... 4-110
4.8.2
NEXRAD Limitations........................................................... 4-110
4.8.3
NEXRAD Intensity............................................................... 4-110
4.8.4
NEXRAD............................................................................ 4-111
4.8.5
NEXRAD Weather Setup..................................................... 4-111
4.9 Stormscope........................................................................................ 4-126
Foreword
Sec 1
System
5.2
Sec 3
MFD
5.5
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5.4
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 2
PFD
5.3
6
5.1.2
FliteCharts.............................................................................. 5-4
5.1.3
Determining Chart Database Type, Coverage, and Currency..... 5-5
5.1.4
Selecting a Chart.................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5
Using Charts........................................................................ 5-12
SafeTaxi .............................................................................................. 5-18
5.2.1
Using SafeTaxi .................................................................... 5-19
5.2.2
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision..................................... 5-21
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment................................................. 5-22
5.3.1
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services........................... 5-22
5.3.2
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Information..................................... 5-23
5.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment................................. 5-25
5.3.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting................... 5-30
Helicopter Synthetic Vision Technology (Optional).................................. 5-31
5.4.1
HSVT Operation.................................................................... 5-32
5.4.2
Activating and Deactivating HSVT......................................... 5-33
5.4.3
HSVT Features...................................................................... 5-34
GFC 600H Operation........................................................................... 5-43
5.5.1
Heading Select Mode........................................................... 5-43
5.5.2
Altitude Capture................................................................... 5-43
5.5.3
Vertical Speed Control.......................................................... 5-43
5.5.4
Selected Airspeed................................................................. 5-43
5.5.5
FCS Navigation.................................................................... 5-43
5.5.6
Flight Director Display........................................................... 5-44
5.5.7
Autopilot Mode Annunciations............................................. 5-44
Annunciations and Alerts......................................................................6-1
6.1 Alerts.................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 System Status...................................................................................... 6-17
7
Symbols.................................................................................................7-1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
Map Page Symbols................................................................................. 7-1
SafeTaxi Symbols.................................................................................... 7-2
Traffic Symbols....................................................................................... 7-2
Basemap Symbols.................................................................................. 7-4
Map Tool Bar Symbols............................................................................ 7-5
Ownship Symbols................................................................................... 7-6
Miscellaneous Symbols........................................................................... 7-6
8 Glossary................................................................................................8-1
Appendix A Databases............................................................................ A-1
xii
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Index............................................................................................................ B-1
Foreword
A.1 SD Card Use and Databases...................................................................A-1
A.1.1
Aviation Databases................................................................A-3
A.1.2
Garmin Databases..................................................................A-5
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
xiii
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
xiv
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
System Description
Foreword
1
Sec 3
MFD
Garmin Navigator(s)
Sec 2
PFD
GMU 44 Magnetometer
Sec 1
System
This section provides an overview of the G500H Avionics Display System.
The G500H system is an integrated display system that presents primary flight
instrumentation, navigation, and a moving map to the pilot through largeformat displays.
In normal operating mode, the Primary Flight Display (PFD) presents
graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, vertical
speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster. The Multi-Function
Display (MFD) normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation
information, as well as supplemental data.
GTP 59 Temperature Probe
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GDU 620
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
AHRS
Air Data Computer
Optional Interfaces
Weather
Datalink
Traffic
Radar
Altimeter
Navigation
Radio
ADF
Weather
Radar
DME
External
Video
GAD 43/43e
Sec 8
Glossary
Autopilot
Flight Director
Sec 7
Symbols
Audio Panel
Figure 1-1 G500H System (LRU Configuration)
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-1
Foreword
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 620 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GNS 480, CNX 80, GNS 400W series, GNS 500W series,
GTN 600 series, GTN 700 series, or a compatible GPS Navigator
• Temperature Probe (such as the GTP 59)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
Interfaces to various other rotorcraft systems and equipment are supported,
including:
• GAD 43/43e Adapter
• GDL 69/69A Satellite Data Link Receiver
• GSR 56 Satellite Data Link Receiver
• Autopilot/Flight Director
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• GDL 88H / GTX 345 ADS-B Transceiver
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
• Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• COM/NAV - Garmin GTR/GNC or SL30 COM/NAV radios, or selected
third-party radios
• ADF
• Garmin GTS or GTX traffic awareness systems, or selected third-party
devices
• Garmin GWX radar systems or selected third-party radars
• Radar Altimeter
• Video Sources
• Stormscope
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
• Audio Panel
1-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.1.1
Standard System Line Replaceable Units
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1.1.1.1
GDU 620
The GDU 620 has dual VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 6.5 inch LCD displays. The
right side of the GDU is a PFD and the left side is the MFD. In some models or
installations, the PFD and MFD and their controls are switched to the other side.
The MFD shows a moving map, flight plan, weather, and other supplemental
data. The PFD shows primary flight information, in place of traditional
Pitot-static and gyroscopic systems and also provides a Horizontal Situation
Indicator (HSI) for navigation.
Foreword
This guide covers the operation of the GDU 620 display as integrated in
the G500H system. The G500H Avionics Display System is an avionics suite
designed to replace the traditional flight instrument cluster. The system combines
primary flight instrumentation, navigational information, and a moving map all
displayed on dual color screens. The G500H system is composed of sub-units
or Line Replaceable Units (LRUs). LRUs have a modular design, which greatly
eases troubleshooting and maintenance of the G500H system. A failure or
problem can be isolated to a particular LRU, which can be replaced quickly and
easily. Each LRU has a particular function, or set of functions, that contributes
to the system’s operation.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 1-2 GDU 620 PFD and MFD
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-3
Figure 1-3 Air Data Computer
1.1.1.3
Attitude Heading Reference System
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating in normal
mode may degrade AHRS accuracy.
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) unit provides rotorcraft
attitude information to the G500H display. The unit contains advanced
accelerometers and rate sensors and interfaces with both the ADC and the
GMU 44 magnetometer. The AHRS utilizes GPS data forwarded from the
GDU 620. Attitude and heading information is sent to the GDU 620 using an
ARINC 429 digital interface.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
1.1.1.2
Air Data Computer
The Air Data Computer (ADC) compiles information from the Pitot-static
system and an Outside Air Temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the G500H
system. The ADC communicates with the GDU 620 and AHRS using an ARINC
429 digital interface.
Index
Appendix A
Figure 1-4 AHRS
The International Geomagnetic Reference Field (IGRF) model is contained in
the AHRS and is updated once every five years. The IGRF model is part of the
Navigation Database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the AHRS and
the Navigation Database are compared. If the IGRF model in the AHRS is out of
date, the user is prompted to update. The prompt will appear after the G500H
splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD.
1-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
AHRS Inputs
Available
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
Available/
Normal
Unavailable
Available No Mag
No Air/
Unavailable
No Mag
Available No GPS
Heading
Available
Available
Available
GPS Track
Available
GPS Track
Available
Available
Available*/
Available No Mag
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Fail
Unavailable Unavailable
Unavailable
Fail
Unavailable Unavailable
* - GSU 75 only.
AHRS Normal
Operation
Heading
Invalid
AHRS No-GPS
Mode
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 1-1 AHRS Operation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Available
Attitude
Sec 3
MFD
Available
Air Data
Sec 2
PFD
Magnetometer
AHRS Outputs
Sec 1
System
GPS
AHRS
Mode
Foreword
Attitude and heading information is displayed on the PFD when the AHRS
receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 1-5 AHRS Operation
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the
pilot by message advisory alerts. For specific AHRS alert information, refer to
Section 6 on page 6-1. Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results
in loss of attitude and heading information. This is indicated by red “X” flags
over the corresponding flight instruments.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-5
NOTE: In this case, the magnetic standby compass and GPS ground track
can be used to keep the rotorcraft on the desired heading.
Map orientations change from HDG UP to TRACK UP and Map orientations
will change back to HDG up when heading is restored.
When heading fails, the heading bug is not removed and the GDU continues
driving the autopilot heading error output using track in place of heading.
Track Mode Active
Heading Failed
SVT Is Turned Off
When Heading
Fails
Figure 1-6 Track Mode shown as Active when Heading Info has Failed
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is
receiving valid GPS information. Invalid or unavailable airspeed data, in addition
to complete GPS failure, results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
A maximum of two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information
from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an
alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
will continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as
magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude
information and GPS Track information is used. However, the PFD heading
display is flagged as invalid with a red “X” and TRK is annunciated to the right
of the Track value in magenta. The Track value color changes from white to
magenta.
1-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 7
Symbols
Heading reliable
Displayed Indication
The current heading value changes from
white to amber.
The Align Aircraft (ALN) indication
appears to the left of the heading.
Current heading value turns white.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Heading recovery in progress
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Heading unreliable
Table 1-2 AHRS Signals and Indications
Current Heading Unreliable
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
AHRS Signal
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: Depending on the AHRS type and the magnitude of the heading error,
the displayed indication may change directly from unreliable to reliable.
Sec 2
PFD
Heading Considered Unreliable
When the AHRS signals that a heading is unreliable or in recovery, indications
are displayed on the PFD. These indications are automatically removed once the
heading alignment is corrected.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: During in-flight alignment of the AHRS, minimize rotorcraft
maneuvering. The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles
(less than 20° of roll or 5° of pitch). AHRS alignment may not be possible
during more aggressive maneuvers.
Foreword
NOTE: Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the rotorcraft stationary
and with all AHRS inputs valid (3-D GPS position, magnetometer, and
air data). During initial power up on the ground, no GPS position and/or
magnetic anomalies are common. If the rotorcraft is moved prior to AHRS
alignment, alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3-D GPS position
is available.
Heading Recovery in Progress
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Align
Heading
Index
Figure 1-7 AHRS Heading Indications
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-7
Figure 1-8 GMU 44 Magnetometer
1.1.1.5
GTP 59
The GTP 59 temperature probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
data to the ADC.
Figure 1-9 GTP 59 Temperature Probe
1.1.1.6
Garmin Navigator Interface
The G500H system requires connection to at least one external Garmin
WAAS GPS navigator, such as the 400W/500W series, GTN 600/700 series, or
GNS 480.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
1.1.1.4
GMU 44
The GMU 44 magnetometer senses the earth’s magnetic field. Data is sent to
the AHRS for processing to determine rotorcraft magnetic heading. This unit
receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with the AHRS using
a RS-485 digital interface.
1-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.1.2
Optional Line Replaceable Units
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Garmin GWX system, or selected 3rd party radar, provides airborne
weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Weather Radar
Sec 3
MFD
1.1.2.3
Sec 2
PFD
1.1.2.2
GTX 345
The GTX 345 is a combined mode S/ES transponder and ADS-B transceiver.
Mode S/ES models have an optional internal GPS/SBAS receiver.
The GDU only displays ADS-B information, it does not control the GTX.
Sec 1
System
1.1.2.1
GDL 88H
The GDL 88H is a remotely mounted ADS-B transceiver. There are four
models of the GDL 88H. Models with a single bottom mounted UAT antenna
meet TSO C154c Class A1S and are available with or without an internal GPS/
SBAS receiver. Models with one top mounted and one bottom mounted antenna
meet TSO C154c Class A1H and are also available with or without an internal
GPS/SBAS receiver.
Foreword
A variety of LRUs are available to expand and enhance the G500H system.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 1-10 GWX 68 Weather Radar
1.1.2.4
Stormscope
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-9
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Appendix A
The WX-500 Stormscope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the rotorcraft. The Stormscope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports
the information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the
WX-500 Stormscope System.
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 Stormscope.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1.1.2.6
GDL 69/69A
The GDL 69/69A is a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver that
receives broadcast weather data. The GDL 69A is the same as the GDL 69 with
the addition of a SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment receiver. Weather
data and control of audio channel and volume is displayed on the MFD, via
a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. The GDL 69A is also
interfaced to an audio panel for distribution of the audio signal. A subscription
to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the GDL 69/69A
capability. Subscription information is available at: http://www.garmin.com/xm/.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
1.1.2.5
GSR 56
The GSR 56 is an Iridium satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone
calls, rotorcraft position reporting, and world wide weather products.
Figure 1-11 GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver
1.1.2.7
GAD 43/43e
The GAD 43 is an adapter that converts AHRS digital pitch, roll, heading
and yaw rate data into analog signals used by autopilot systems. The GAD 43
is installed remotely between the AHRS and an existing autopilot. The analog
signals from the GAD 43 mimic those of spinning-mass gyros that provide data
to the autopilot and allow the gyro to be replaced by the AHRS and GAD 43
combination.
The GAD 43e performs the same functions as the GAD 43, but adds support
for additional interfaces to various rotorcraft systems. The GAD 43e supports
interfaces to various autopilots (for altitude preselect and vertical speed control),
analog NAV radios, DME, analog radar altimeters, marker beacons, and ADF
receivers.
1-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 1-12 GAD 43/43e AHRS Adapter
1.1.2.8
GTX 330/330D/335
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: GTX 330/330D/335 can also be used to display traffic information
on the GDU 620.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 1-13 GTX 330/330D Mode S Transponder
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
1.1.2.9
GEA 71
The GEA 71 receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe
sensors.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The GTX 330/330D/335 is a solid-state transponder that provides Modes
A, C, and S functions. The transponder provides traffic information to the display through an ARINC 429 digital interface. In the following figure, the GTX
330/330D Mode S Transponder is shown as typical.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 1-14 GEA 71
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-11
Foreword
The GFC 600H is a high performance, attitude-based AFCS that supports an
extensive set of operating modes and safety features. Supported functions vary
by installation. The GFC 600H provide the following main operating functions:
• Attitude Hold (ATT) - When in ATT, the GFC 600H system holds pitch/
roll attitude.
• Flight Director (FD) - The FD function provides pitch and roll commands
to achieve lateral and/or vertical control objectives. If the system is not
coupled to the FD command, pitch and roll commands are displayed on
the PFD as command bars. When the flight director is active, the pitch and
roll commands can be hand-flown by the pilot. When the AFCS is coupled,
the servos drive the flight controls to follow the commands issued by the
flight director.
• Yaw Axis Control - The optional yaw function compensates for collective/
yaw axis coupling, assists with dutch roll damping, provides turn
coordination, and assists in maintaining heading in a hover. If installed
the YD comes on when the autopilot is engaged. It can be turned on/off
independent of the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flying
maneuvers.
• Limit Cue - The Limit Cue function provides a soft barrier to keep the
aircraft within the operating envelope.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
CAUTION: Do not use the GMC 605H USB port in flight. The port is not
designed to provied power or data to external consumer devices such as
smart phone, cameras, or tablets.
Sec 1
System
GFC 600H
Sec 2
PFD
1.1.2.10
1-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.2
System Power Up
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NOTE: During in-flight alignment of the AHRS, minimize rotorcraft
maneuvering. The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles
(less than 20° of roll or 5° of pitch). AHRS alignment may not be possible
during more aggressive maneuvers.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the rotorcraft stationary
and with all AHRS inputs valid (3-D GPS position, magnetometer, and
air data). During initial power up on the ground, no GPS position and/or
magnetic anomalies are common. If the rotorcraft is moved prior to AHRS
alignment, alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3-D GPS position
is available.
Sec 2
PFD
The G500H System is integrated with the rotorcraft electrical system and
receives power directly from electrical buses. The GDU 620 and supporting
sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, memory, external inputs, and outputs to ensure safe
operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system
annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after powerup. Upon power-up, bezel key backlights also become momentarily illuminated
on the GDU 620 display bezel.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings
Level” is displayed. The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields
typically within the first minute and a half after power-up. The AHRS can align
itself during level flight.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Refer to Section 6 for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
Foreword
NOTE: See the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) for specific procedures
concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply
operation.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-13
Foreword
Sec 1
System
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen displays the following
information:
• Software version and part number
• Basemap database version
• Terrain database version
• Obstacle database expiration date
• Airport directory database expiration date
• Chart database status
Current databases display in white. Databases display in yellow if expired,
not yet effective, or current GPS date/time is unavailable.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Aviation database expiration date
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 1-15 System Startup Pages
1-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.3
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
GSU AHRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE:
UPDATE AS FOLLOWS?
yyyy to yyyy
###-#####-## to ###-#####-##
Sec 3
MFD
GRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE:
UPDATE AS FOLLOWS?
yyyy to yyyy
###-#####-## to ###-#####-##
Sec 2
PFD
For GSU 75:
Sec 1
System
For GRS 77/79:
Foreword
The IGRF (International Geomagnetic Reference Field) model is contained
in the AHRS and is only updated once every five years. The IGRF model is
part of the Navigation Database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the
AHRS and in the Navigation Database are compared, and if the IGRF model
in the AHRS is out of date, the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in
the AHRS. After the G500H splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD, the
following update message appears.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
To initiate the update process, follow the on-screen instructions.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. When the Update message appears, press the ENT key with OK highlighted.
To update at another time, turn the Large knob to highlight Cancel and then
press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
2. After the update is complete, press the ENT key to continue normal operation.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-15
Index
Figure 1-16 GRS MV DB Update
System Operation
NOTE: For detailed descriptions of all alerts and annunciations, refer to
Section 6 on page 6-1.
1.4.1
Pilot Controls
The GDU 620 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the
system and minimize workload and the time required to access functionality.
Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and are comprised of a PFD
knob, MFD dual concentric knobs, bezel keys, and soft keys.
1.4.1.1
PFD Knob
Pressing the PFD knob performs the default action for the selected mode.
For details, refer to the PFD Bezel Keys section.
Heading
Mode
Course
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Vertical Speed
Mode
Barometer
Mode
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.4
NOTE: After 10 seconds of inactivity in another mode, the PFD knob
selected mode will revert to Heading mode.
1. Press the desired PFD mode selection key (HDG, CRS, ALT, V/S, or BARO).
A window will be displayed near the upper left corner of the HSI showing the
current value for that mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to select the desired value.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-17 Selection Modes Adjusted with the PFD Knob
1-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.4.1.2
PFD Bezel Keys
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Altitude Select Window
Sec 2
PFD
Altimeter (ALT)
Selects Altitude Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Altitude Select mode
will enter the current altitude in the Altitude Select window. Set the Altitude Bug
by turning the PFD knob after pressing the ALT key.
Sec 1
System
Course (CRS)
Selects Course Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Course mode will
center the CDI for a VOR or GPS OBS course.
Foreword
Heading (HDG)
Selects Heading Select mode. This is the default mode for the PFD knob.
Pressing the PFD knob in Heading mode will center the Heading Bug on the
current Heading. Set the heading bug on the HSI by turning the PFD knob after
pressing the HDG key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Altitude Bug
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Current Altitude
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Barometric Setting
Figure 1-18 Pressing PFD Knob Sets Altitude Select to Current Altitude
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-17
Vertical Speed Bug
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Vertical Speed (V/S)
Selects Vertical Speed (V/S) mode. Pressing the PFD knob in V/S mode will
synchronize the bug to the current vertical speed.
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Figure 1-19 Pressing V/S Knob Sets Vertical Speed Bug to Current Vertical Speed
For helicopters with vertical speed operating limitations, red bands showing
Vertical Speed Maximum and Minimum ranges will be shown on the left side of
the Vertical Speed tape. When the Vertical Speed Indicator is in one of the red
ranges, the background color of the Vertical Speed Indicator will turn red.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 7
Symbols
Vertical Speed Maximum
Vertical Speed Bug
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 8
Glossary
Vertical Speed Indicator
Appendix A
Vertical Speed Minimum
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Index
Figure 1-20 Vertical Speed Warning Indication
1-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Barometer (BARO)
Selects Barometric Setting Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Baro mode
toggles between standard pressure (29.92 in/1013 mb) and the previously
selected value.
Sec 1
System
Small (Inner) MFD Knob
Selects a specific page within a page group. Pressing the small MFD knob
turns the selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be
entered in the applicable window by turning the small and large MFD knobs. In
this case, the large MFD knob moves the cursor on the page and the small MFD
knob selects individual characters or values for the highlighted cursor location.
Sec 2
PFD
MFD Bezel Keys
Appendix A
Clear (CLR)
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and
holding the CLR key displays the Navigation Map 1 page.
Sec 8
Glossary
Enter (ENT)
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
Sec 7
Symbols
Menu
Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access
additional features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Range (RNG)
Pressing the Range arrow keys changes the range on the Map pages. The Up
arrow zooms out. The Down arrow zooms in. The keys also aid in scrolling up
and down text pages.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1.4.1.4
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Large (Outer) MFD Knob
Selects the MFD page group. When the cursor is ON, the large MFD knob
moves the cursor to highlight available fields.
Sec 3
MFD
1.4.1.3
MFD Knobs
The MFD knobs are for navigating and selecting information on the MFD
pages. More details are provided in the MFD section.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-19
Using the Soft Key Controls
The soft keys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The soft key
labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed. The bezel
keys below the soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key.
MFD functions indicated by the soft key labels vary depending on the page
selected and are located at the bottom of the MFD display. Press the soft key
located directly below the soft key label. To select the function indicated on the
soft key label, press the soft key directly below the label.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.4.2
Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Keys
Soft Keys
Figure 1-21 MFD Soft Key Layout
1.4.3
Using the Page Menus
The GDU 620 has a dedicated MENU key that when pressed displays a
context-sensitive list of options for functions in the MFD. This options list allows
the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically
relate to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing
menu. Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view,
edit, select, and review options. Menus display “No Options” when there are no
options for the window/page selected. Soft key presses do not display menus or
submenus.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Soft Key Labels
1-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.4.3.1
Navigating within a Menu
No Options
Options for MAP Window
Sec 2
PFD
4. Press the CLR key or MFD knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Sec 1
System
3. Press the ENT key to select the desired option.
Foreword
1. Press the MENU key to display the menu.
2. Turn the small or large MFD knob to scroll through a list of available options (a
scroll bar always appears to the right of the window/box when the option list
is longer than the window/box).
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 1-22 Page Menu Examples
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-21
G500H system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup
Page. For details on how to change settings, refer to section 3.2.
1. From the first AUX page, press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the desired value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF.
3. Press ENTER to save the setting.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
System Settings
Sec 1
System
1.4.4
Index
Appendix A
Figure 1-23 System Setup Page
1-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Settings
Level
Mode
Airspeeds
1-23
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Airspeed
Indicator
True Airspeed
Wind speed
vector
Map range
(Traffic Page,
Terrain
Proximity
Page)
Appendix A
Imperial (SM, MPH) Bearing distances (info
Metric (KM, KPH)
window)
Nautical (NM, KT) Distance (info window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS field (Navigation Status
Box)
All distances on MFD
All speeds on MFD
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. M
SAT, TAT, ISA
Sec 7
Symbols
Temperature
Reference
Distance and
Speed
Nav Status
option not
available in all
installations.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
CDI Preview
PFD wind vector display
format.
Location of GPS navigation
data.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Date
Time
Time Format
Time Offset
On/Off
Not available in
all installations.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Date/Time
CDI Source, BARO
Correction, Databases, and
Charts
Sec 3
MFD
Style 1 - 2
Reference markers on PFD
airspeed tape
Sec 2
PFD
(NAV Status)
Exceptions
Sec 1
System
Glide (or REF)
VR
VX (or V1)
VY (or V2)
Synchronization CDI Source - On/Off
BARO - On/Off
Databases - On/Off
Chart Streaming On/Off
PFD Options
(Wind Vector) Off, Style 1 - Style 4
Affected Quantities
Brightness levels on the PFD
and MFD
Foreword
Category
Display
Brightness
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Feet
Meters
Navigation
Angle
Magnetic (North)
True (North)
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Barometric
Setting
Inches (in)
Hectopascals (hpa)
Barometric pressure on PFD
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
SiriusXM
FIS
GFDS
All temperatures on PFD
Data Link
(WX/TFR
Source)
Settings
Affected Quantities
All elevations on MFD
Exceptions
Altimeter
Vertical Speed
Indicator
Select weather source.
Table 1-3 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Category
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
1-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1.4.5
Display Backlighting
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1.4.5.1
Foreword
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel keys can be
adjusted automatically or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting
adjustment) uses the photocell located at the top right corner of the bezel to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration
curves are configured by the installer to optimize display appearance through a
broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Display backlighting adjustment can
be manually controlled using the rotorcraft’s existing instrument panel dimmer
bus or performing the following procedures.
Backlighting Adjustment
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the MODE field. Turn the small MFD
knob to select AUTO or MANUAL and then press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-24 Display Brightness Adjustment
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Auto or Manual
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Manual Adjustment 0.1% to 100%
or Auto
Sec 3
MFD
1. From the first AUX page, press the small MFD knob to highlight the DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS, MODE box.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired brightness Level and then press
ENTER.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
1-25
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
1-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Sec 1
System
Horizon Trim Ball Roll Scale Roll
Line Indicator
Zero Pointer
Foreword
Functions on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) are accessed by using the
bezel keys on the side of the PFD and the soft keys below the PFD.
Nav Status Bar
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
PFD Knob
Mode Indicator
Wind Vectors
Air
Temperature
Horizontal
Situation
Indicator
Sec 3
MFD
Altitude Tape
Vertical
Speed Tape
Current
Barometric
Pressure Setting
Heading Bug Select
Course Select
Altitude Bug Select
Vertical Speed Bug Select
Barometric Setting Select
Air Speed Tape
PFD Knob
SD Card Slots
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Soft Keys
Soft Key Labels
Figure 2-1 PFD Description (Ground Pointer Mode)
Current FPL
Desired Track
Leg Wpt
Distance from Your
Present Position to
Current Nav
Current FPL Leg Wpt
Source
Current Track
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Nav Status Style 1 - Top of Display
Nav Status Style 2 - Left of HSI
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-1
Index
NOTE: When navigating to a waypoint very far away, the DTK, CRS, and
TRK values displayed on the GDU 620 may differ from those displayed
on the navigator, however the CDI is correct and is the primary means
of navigation. This is because the GDU 620 applies magnetic variation
corrections for the current rotorcraft location, but some navigators apply
magnetic variation correction for the waypoint location.
Appendix A
Figure 2-2 PFD Nav Status Bar Description
PFD Soft Keys
AP TEST
CDI
PFD
1-2
GPS
Source 1
VOR/ILS
Source 2
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.1
SYN VIS
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
DME
Sec 3
MFD
DME NAV 1
DME NAV 2
DME HOLD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
BRG
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NAV 1
GPS 1
ADF
BRG 2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NAV 2
GPS 2
ADF
CLK/TMR
Sec 7
Symbols
HIDE
CLOCK/TIMER
START/STOP
RESET
BACK
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 2-3 PFD Soft Key Diagram
The soft keys are located along the bottom of the displays below the soft key
labels. The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being
displayed. The soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key function.
Index
Appendix A
BRG 1
2-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Selected Soft Key
Unselected Soft Key
Foreword
Soft Key Labels
Soft Keys
Sec 1
System
Unselected Soft Key
Soft Key Not Available
For Selection
Sec 2
PFD
Soft Key Labels
Figure 2-4 PFD Soft Key Layout
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
1-2
The 1-2 soft key toggles between the available receivers for selected navigation
source (i.e. GPS1 and GPS2 or VOR/LOC1 and VOR/LOC2). This soft key
will only be present if the system is configured for a second GPS or VOR/
LOC.
Sec 7
Symbols
CDI
The CDI soft key toggles between the selection of GPS or VOR/LOC as the
active navigation source. In a single GDU 620 system, the GDU CDI soft
key will change the source in the connected navigator and making a source
change in the navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620. In a dual GDU 620
system, the CDI keys in the navigator will be disabled.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The AP TEST soft key is available if the GAD 43 is used to provide attitude
information to an autopilot. The AP TEST soft key disengages the autopilot
as part of the GAD 43 test.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
AP Test
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: If a soft key is pressed and held for longer than 1 second, it is
ignored.
Sec 3
MFD
When a soft key is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background
and remains this way until it is turned off, at which time it reverts to white text
on black background. When a soft key function is disabled, the soft key label is
subdued (dimmed).
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-3
Foreword
PFD
Pressing the PFD soft key displays the SYN VIS, DME, BRG, and BACK soft
keys. The DME and SYN VIS soft keys will only be present if the system is
configured for these features.
Sec 1
System
BRG1
The BRG1 soft key cycles through the available bearing 1 indicator modes
(NAV1, GPS1, ADF, or None).
Sec 2
PFD
BRG2
Sec 3
MFD
The BRG2 soft key cycles through the available bearing 2 indicator modes
(NAV2, GPS2, ADF, or None). This soft key will only be present if the system
is configured for a second GPS or VOR/LOC.
DME
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The DME NAV soft keys select the DME submenu. For some installations, the
DME NAV soft keys simply toggle the DME display on/off as the submenu
options will not exist. The availability of the DME controls vary based on the
installation.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The DME NAV soft keys select NAV 1 or 2 as the DME tuning source. If this
soft key is pressed again when already selected, the DME display is removed
from the PFD. Not all installations will have both NAV1 and NAV2 soft keys.
Sec 7
Symbols
DME Information
DME Hold Annunciation
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected DME
Set Hold for Selected DME
Figure 2-5 DME Soft Keys
Index
Appendix A
DME HOLD
DME HOLD activates/deactivates the DME tuning hold function. DME
HOLD may be selected for either DME NAV 1 or DME NAV 2. The Hold
function is automatically canceled when switching between NAV1 and
NAV2 tuning sources. Not all installations will have the DME HOLD soft
key.
2-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
SYN VIS
Foreword
The SYN VIS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed.
It enables Synthetic Vision and displays the associated soft keys.
SYN TERR
Sec 1
System
The SYN TERR soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed
and enables synthetic terrain depiction.
HRZN HDG
CLK/TMR
Hide Clock
Select
Timer
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Clock/Timer function displays a clock or timer window in the lower left
corner of the PFD.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The APTSIGNS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is
installed and enables airport sign posts for airports. Only heliports in the
current flight plan are shown.
Sec 3
MFD
APTSIGNS
Sec 2
PFD
The HRZN HDG soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is
installed. Pressing this key enables horizon heading marks and digits.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Select
Start
Reset
Clock
Timer
Timer
Figure 2-6 Clock and Timer Functions
Sec 7
Symbols
Hide Timer
BACK
Sec 8
Glossary
The BACK soft key returns to the previous soft key menu.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-5
NOTE: Airspeed units (KTS, MPH, KPH) are configured to match the approved
units for the installation.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Airspeed Indicator provides Indicated Airspeed, True Airspeed, and
Ground Speed. The Airspeed Trend Indicator shows what the airspeed will be
in six seconds, if the current acceleration is maintained. The actual airspeed is
displayed inside the black pointer.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, pink/magenta line, extending up or
down on the airspeed scale, shown to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip. The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in six
seconds if the current acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses into
the overspeed range, the text of the digital airspeed readout changes to yellow.
The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to
calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
When interfaced to the GFC 600H, the Vne Power-on and Power-off
indications adjust to reflect the current Vne at the current altitude. Cold weather
adjustments are not compensated for in the variable Vne depiction. Refer to
aircraft specific flight manual supplements for additional details and limitations
regarding the variable Vne indications.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Airspeed Indicator
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are
marked at intervals of 10 units, while minor tick marks on the moving tape are
indicated at intervals of five units. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, regardless
of the displayed units.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.2
2-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Ground Speed
Overspeed Range (Red)
Maximum (Vne) Speed With Engine On
Airspeed Trend Indicator (pink/magenta line)
Sec 1
System
Current Airspeed
Sec 2
PFD
OR
Maximum (Vne Power Off) Speed With Engine Off or
Maximum Autorotation Speed
One of the two marking types is selected during the
installation configuration.
Sec 3
MFD
Normal Operating Range (Green)
True Airspeed
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Airspeed Units
Figure 2-7 Airspeed Tape
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Overspeed Range (Barber Pole)
Overspeed Indication for
Current Airspeed
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Caution Operating Range
The selected airspeed bug only displays when IAS mode is engaged on the
GFC 600H.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-8 Overspeed Indication
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Selected Airspeed Bug
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 2-9 Selected Airspeed Bug
2-7
NOTE: The actual colors and patterns of the airspeed tape may vary by
installation. See your RFM/POH for more details.
Sec 2
PFD
2.2.2
Reference Speeds
V-speeds (Glide and VY) default values are set during the installation process,
but can be changed and turned on/off from the System Setup page on the first
page of the Aux page group. When active (on), the V-speeds are displayed at
their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Markings
A color-coded speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
are configured to match the approved markings for the installation. Refer to the
RFM/POH.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.2.1
Glide Reference Marker
Vy Reference Marker
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-10 Reference Speeds
2-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.3
Attitude Indicator
1
6
10
5
2
Roll Scale
3
Aircraft Symbol
4
Horizon Line
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Trim Ball Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
10
Pitch Reference Bars
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The Trim Ball Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves
with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral
acceleration. Trim is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
One bar displacement (as shown below) is equal to one ball displacement on a
traditional Trim Ball Indicator.
Sec 7
Symbols
Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.
Major tick marks are 30º and 60º and minor tick marks are 10º, 20º, and 45º
are shown to the left and right of the zero.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line,
major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10º, up to 80º. Minor
pitch marks are shown for intervening 5º increments, up to 25º below and 45º
above the horizon line. Between 20º below to 20º above the horizon line, minor
pitch marks occur every 2.5º.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-11 Attitude Indicator
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4
Roll Pointer
Sec 3
MFD
3
8
1
Sec 2
PFD
2
7
Sec 1
System
9
Foreword
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground
with a white horizon line. The Attitude Indicator displays pitch, roll, and slip/
skid information.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-9
Roll Scale Zero
Trim Ball Indicator
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Roll Pointer
Ground/Sky Pointer mode is configured during installation and can not be
changed by the pilot.
In a rotorcraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Ground Pointer, the
pointer above the Roll Scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the rotorcraft to
keep the Roll Scale Zero Pointer pointing towards the ground.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-12 Trim Indication
Roll Pointer
Roll Scale Zero Pointer
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Roll Scale
Figure 2-13 Attitude Indicator with a Ground Pointer Configuration in a Left Turn
In a rotorcraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Sky Pointer, the pointer
below the roll scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the rotorcraft to keep the
Roll Pointer pointing towards the sky.
Sec 8
Glossary
Roll Scale Zero Pointer
Roll Pointer
Appendix A
Roll Scale
Index
Figure 2-14 Attitude Indicator with a Sky Pointer Configuration in a Left Turn
Figure 2-15
2-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.3.1
Extreme Attitude
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
• Clock/Timer Field
Foreword
Extreme attitude is defined as a roll greater than 65º left or right, 30º pitch up,
or 20º pitch down. Red chevrons are displayed at greater than 50º pitch up and
30º pitch down. The PFD will declutter when the rotorcraft enters an extreme
attitude. Only the primary functions will be displayed in these situations.
The following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding soft
keys are disabled) when the rotorcraft is in an unusual attitude:
• BARO and Radar Altimeter
• Radar Altimeter Digital Readout
Minimums
• Selected Altitude, Barometer
Setting, and Selected Vertical
Speed
• TAS Airspeed and Airspeed Units
• Flight Director Command Bars
• Traffic and Terrain
Annunciations
• GPSS Annunciation
• NAV Status
• Wind Field
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Marker Beacon Annunciation
• Vertical Course Deviation
Indicator and Glideslope
Annunciation
• Knob Mode Annunciation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Fast/Slow Indicator
Sec 3
MFD
• DME Field
• Outside Air Temperature
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 2-16 Extreme Pitch Indication
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-11
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-17 Extreme Pitch Indication Nose Down
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-18 Extreme Pitch Indication Nose Up
Index
Figure 2-19 Extreme Roll Indication with Display Declutter
2-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.4
Altimeter
The altimeter displays the current altitude, altitude trend, altitude bug setting,
altitude bug, and the current BARO setting.
Foreword
The Altitude Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down
on the left side of the Altitude scale. The end of the trend vector corresponds to
the predicted altitude in six seconds if the current vertical speed is maintained.
Sec 1
System
The Altitude Bug is displayed at the selected Altitude Bug setting. A portion
of the Altitude Bug will be displayed at the top or the bottom of the altitude tape
if the selected Altitude Bug is off of the tape.
Sec 2
PFD
When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed, the altitude received from
the radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD. For details, refer to the Radar
Altimeter section.
Sec 3
MFD
Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1. Press the ALT key to activate Altitude mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to move the Altitude Bug to a desired altitude.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Normally the altitude alerter only allows selection of altitudes in 100 foot
increments. When a value other than 100 feet is set for the minimums value, it
becomes a selectable value in the altitude alerter.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.4.1
OR
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Press the center of the PFD knob to set the selected altitude to the current
altitude.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-13
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Selected
Altitude in
the Altitude
Alerter
window
Current
Altitude
Sec 2
PFD
Altitude
Trend
Indicator
VNAV Altitude
Constraint
Sec 3
MFD
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting
2.4.2
Altitude Alerting
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural
alerts (if interfaced to an audio panel) when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset.
NOTE: The Altitude Alerter function may be disabled in some installations.
When the Altitude Alerter is disabled, pressing the ALT key will result in
an ALT KEY INOP message.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-20 Altimeter
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1,000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) changes to black text on a light blue
background, and flashes for five seconds. An audio alert may be generated,
if configured.
• When the rotorcraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the
Selected Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds and an aural tone may be generated, if configured.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation
band (beyond ±200 feet of the Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude
changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and
an aural tone is generated.
2-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Within 1,000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Foreword
Figure 2-20 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Altitude
Constraints (Software v7.30 or Later)
Sec 2
PFD
2.4.3
Sec 7
Symbols
Indicates the aircraft must be at displayed altitude.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Indicates the aircraft must be at or below displayed altitude.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Indicates the aircraft must be at or above displayed altitude.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Description
Sec 3
MFD
VNAV altitude constraints display when vertical navigation guidance is
received from a GTN 650/750 with software v6.50 or later. Altitudes are
manually entered in the GTN or retrieved from the published altitudes in the
navigation database. Altitude constraints are displayed in feet mean sea level
(MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An altitude constraint in feet above ground
level (AGL) is supported for airports.
Visual
Annunciation
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The aural tone when approaching the selected altitude may be
configured at installation for either 200 feet or 1,000 feet. The tone when
deviating from the selected altitude always occurs at 200 feet.
Table 2-22 Vertical Speed Settings
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-15
1. Press the BARO key to activate Baro mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to increase or decrease the altimeter setting.
OR
3. Press the PFD knob while in Baro mode to toggle between Standard Pressure
(29.92 in) and the currently selected barometric setting.
PFD Knob Selected
Baro Setting
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Changing Barometric Setting
The Barometric Setting affects the altitude values shown on the PFD.
Barometric pressure units may be displayed as either inches (in) or hectopascals
(hpa). For more details, refer to System Display Units in section 3.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.4.4
Baro Setting shown
in Altimeter window
Figure 2-23 Barometric Setting
2.4.4.1
Baro-Corrected Altitude Versus GPS-MSL Altitude
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting
the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions. The most accurate
baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However,
because actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions
defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the
baro-corrected altitude (as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL
altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from the
baro-corrected altitude.
2.4.5
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
Alerting
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or
Decision Height (DH) alert can be displayed on the PFD. The values are set
in the Active Flight Plan page or from the Charts page menu. When active,
the minimum descent altitude setting is displayed in the minimums box at the
bottom left of the altitude tape.
2-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Yellow When
Altitude Reached
Sec 3
MFD
White Within 100 ft
Sec 2
PFD
• The minimums box displays the altitude in cyan text. When in range,
the minimums bug displays in cyan on the altitude tape. A portion of the
altitude minimums bug will be displayed at the bottom of the altitude tape
if the selected altitude minimums bug is off of the tape.
• When the rotorcraft is within 100 feet of the selected altitude setting, the
bug and text turn white.
• Once the rotorcraft reaches the selected altitude minimums setting, the bug
and the altitude text turn yellow and the aural “Minimums, minimums” alert
is made one time. The text remains in yellow until the rotorcraft altitude is
more than 50 feet above the set altitude minimum value.
Sec 1
System
The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
Foreword
NOTE: The Altitude Minimums Alerting Bug appears parked at the bottom
of the altitude tape as soon as a value is set in the minimums alerter. The
bug will unpark and start to move up the tape as soon as the altitude is
within the range of the tape. The bug is reset when power is cycled.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Barometric
Minimums
Bug
Barometric
Minimums
Box
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Radar
Altimeter
Minimums
Bug
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-24 Barometric MDA/DH - Alerting Visual Annunciations
Yellow When
Cyan Within 2,500 ft
White Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
Index
Radar
Altimeter
Minimums
Box
Figure 2-25 Radar Altimeter - Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-17
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Setting the Altitude Minimums Bug is performed on either the FPL - Active
Flight Plan page or the FPL - Charts page.
For information about setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Active
Flight Plan page, refer to section 3 - MFD - Flight Plan Pages.
For information about setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Charts
page, refer to section 5 - Additional Features - Charts Menu Selections.
NOTE: If you highlight the minimums Altitude field and hit the CLR key, it
will turn the minimums alerting functionality off.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Alerting is inhibited while the rotorcraft is on the ground and until the
rotorcraft reaches 150 feet above the selected Minimum Altitude. In dual
installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from either GDU
620 and will be synchronized on both units.
2-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.5
Vertical Speed Indicator
Foreword
Vertical speed (V/S) data is presented on the bottom right of the PFD. A
Vertical Speed bug and a bug setting are also available.
Max Vertical Speed
Sec 1
System
Vertical Speed Bug
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 2
PFD
VNAV Required Vertical Speed
Min Vertical Speed
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Figure 2-26 Vertical Speed (V/S) Tape and Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Altitude Tape Range
500 ft
600 ft
700 ft
Sec 8
Glossary
Airspeed Tape Range
60 kts
70 kts
80 kts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VSI (set by installer)
±2000 fpm
±3000 fpm
±4000 fpm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the rotorcraft vertical speed using
a non-moving tape. The tape can be scaled at ±2,000, ±3,000, or ±4,000 fpm as
set by the installer. Major gradations are every 1,000 fpm and minor gradations
every 500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the
tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than
100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds the vertical speed displayed on
the tape, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate
appears inside the pointer. The Vertical Speed Indicator range determines the
airspeed tape range and altitude tape range.
Table 2-27 Vertical Speed Settings
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-19
Setting the Vertical Speed Indicator Bug
1. Press the V/S key to move the knob focus to the Vertical Speed Bug.
2. Turn the PFD knob to change the Vertical Speed Bug.
3. Press the center of the PFD knob to set the Vertical Speed value to the current
vertical speed.
With an installed GFC 600H system, if the autopilot is not in V/S mode and
the V/S key is pressed, a message displaying “KEY INOP V/S” appears.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.5.1
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-28 Key Inop V/S Window
2-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.6
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1
Sec 3
MFD
15
12
2
11
4
10
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3
5
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
9
6
7
8
16
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Course Pointer
10
GPS Level of Service
3
Heading Bug
11
To/From Indicator
4
Navigation Source
12
Current Track Indicator
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
15
Lubber Line
8
OBS Mode Active
16
MSG (Message) on Navigator
Appendix A
9
Sec 8
Glossary
Turn Rate Indicator
Sec 7
Symbols
1
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Index
Figure 2-29 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
14
Sec 1
System
13
Foreword
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in
a heading-up orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels
occur every 30º. Major tick marks are at 10º intervals and minor tick marks at
5º intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI,
and the current ground track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond.
The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation
source information. The MSG annunciation will be shown in the HSI when
an unacknowledged message is present on the selected navigator. When the
message is acknowledged, the MSG annunciation will clear.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-21
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
2.6.1
Setting the Heading Bug
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds
after being adjusted. The light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the
Selected Heading.
NOTE: The current heading will have a "T" to the right of the heading
value when the Nav Angle is set to True in the System Setup page of the
Aux page group.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
The 360º HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course
Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course
pointer is a single line arrow (GPS1, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line arrow
(GPS2, VOR2, and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. “LOC”
will automatically be displayed if a localizer frequency is tuned. The To/From
arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID
is received.
Current Heading
(Magnetic North)
Heading Bug
New Heading Bug Setting
(Magnetic North)
Current Heading
(True north)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
New Heading Bug Setting
(True North)
1. Press the HDG key to activate HDG mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to change the Heading Bug.
OR
3. Press the PFD knob in HDG mode to set the Heading Bug to the current
heading.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-30 Heading Bug Setting
2-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.6.2
Turn Rate Indicator
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Heading Bug
Lubber Line
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Sec 2
PFD
Standard Turn Rate
Sec 1
System
Turn Rate indication.
Arrowhead shown for
a Turn Rate > 4° per
second
Foreword
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card.
Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half-standard and
standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn
rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds,
based on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator
by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding
to a predicted heading of 18º from the current heading. At rates greater than 4°
per second, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and
the prediction is no longer valid.
Current Track Indicator
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-31 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-23
Course Deviation Indicator
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course
pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display rotorcraft position relative to
the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not displayed.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.7
Sec 2
PFD
360º HSI
GPS Level
of Service
Sec 3
MFD
Navigation
Source
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
CDI
NOTE: The ILS Localizer and Glideslope deviation indicators will indicate
full-scale deflection for the GNS 480 navigator at the second dot. The
GNS 400W/500W series navigators will indicate full-scale deflection at
the edge of the display.
2.7.1
CDI/VDI Preview
When selected, CDI/VDI Preview displays the upcoming VOR/LOC
approach in gray. CDI preview displays as gray hollow lines. Course angle and
source displays in gray text. CDI preview displays for VLOC, LOC Backcourse,
Glideslope, and Glidepath. It is not shown for GPS approaches.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-32 Course Deviation Indicator
Preview On
Preview Off
Figure 2-33 CDI/VDI Preview
2-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.7.2
Changing CDI Sources
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, and LOC).
Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for
VOR and LOC). The full-scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the
CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the
maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack
error (XTK) is displayed below the white rotorcraft symbol.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
VLOC
Navigator 2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
GPS
Navigator 2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VLOC
Navigator 1
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
GPS
Navigator 1
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 2-34 CDI Navigation Sources
1. Press the CDI soft key to toggle between GPS and VOR/LOC source type.
NOTE: The selected navigator is the active navigator for all PFD and MFD
operations, except for the supplemental bearing pointers.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-25
Index
3. Verify the navigation source by the indication on the HSI and in the upper left
corner of the PFD.
Appendix A
2. Press 1-2 soft key to toggle between the 1 and 2 navigators of the GPS or VOR/
LOC sources.
Changing CDI Course
The Selected Course is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after
being adjusted.
New Course Setting
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.7.3
1. Press the CRS key to activate Course mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to change the Course values.
OR
3. Press the PFD knob to set a Course that will center the CDI to the VOR station
or waypoint if in GPS OBS mode.
2.7.4
Vertical Deviation Indicator
The Vertical Deviation (Glideslope) Indicator (VDI) appears to the left of
the VSI whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field. A green
diamond acts as the VDI Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope signal, “NO
GS” is annunciated. The glideslope on an ILS approach hides if the current track
is more than 90° from the selected course. This prevents the glideslope from
being displayed during localizer backcourse approaches.
Vertical Deviation Source
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-35 Course Setting
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Index
Figure 2-36 Vertical Deviation Indicator (ILS Source)
2-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The vertical deviation is similar to the glideslope for GPS approaches
supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). When
an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected
navigation source, the Vertical Deviation Indicator appears as a magenta
diamond. If the approach type downgrades to LNAV past the final approach fix
(FAF), or the approach only supports LNAV service, “NO GP” is annunciated.
Vertical Deviation Source
Sec 2
PFD
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Vertical Deviation Source
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The VDI displays as a magenta chevron when VNAV guidance is received
from a GTN 650/750 with software v6.50 or later. This feature is available on
GDU 620s with software v7.30 or later.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-37 Vertical Deviation Indicator (GPS Source)
Required Vertical Speed
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
When selected, CDI/VDI preview displays upcoming vertical navigation. VDI
preview displays as a gray hollow diamond. VDI preview displays for Glideslope
and Glidepath. If a Top of Descent alert is recieved from the GTN, the V blinks
for 10 seconds.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 2-38 Vertical Deviation Indicator (VNAV)
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-27
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
VDI Preview
2.7.5
Auto-Slewing
The G500H system is designed to interface with GPS navigator units and also
manage up to four different CDI course pointers (GPS1, NAV1, GPS2, NAV2)
independently. The G500H will automatically slew the NAV course pointer
to the correct final approach course when a ILS, LOC, LOC BC, LDA or SDF
approach is active in the GPS navigator and the appropriate frequency is in
the active window in the navigator. The G500H will Auto-Slew the HSI course
pointer for an ILS, LOC, LOC BC, LDA, or SDF approach when the steps below
are completed in the following order:
1. The desired approach is selected and activated in the navigator (this can be
verified by the approach waypoints appearing on the GDU620 MFD Nav Map
Page or FPL Page).
2. The appropriate frequency is the active frequency in the navigator.
3. The CDI selection on the GDU 620 is changed to NAV course pointer for the
active navigator.
NOTE: If the NAV course pointer is displayed for the active navigator
when the approach is activated and the localizer frequency is tuned, the
pilot will need to switch to another CDI source and then back to NAV
for the course pointer to Auto-Slew.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-39 VDI Preview
Index
For example, if NAV1 is currently selected, the pilot must:
press the CDI soft key twice: NAV1>GPS1>NAV1
OR
press the 1-2 soft key twice: NAV1>NAV2>NAV1
2-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Example of activating Auto-Slewing in the G500H:
Foreword
NOTE: For LOC BC approaches, the course pointer will slew 180° from
the inbound course.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Course Pointer slewed
to 313° for the ILS
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. The appropriate ILS frequency must be activate in the navigator.
4. Upon approaching the final course, select LOC on the HSI.
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Verify that the waypoints for the approach are displayed on the Nav Map Page
or the FPL Page of the MFD.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. The rotorcraft is flying vectors to final on an active ILS approach, with the
appropriate approach in the GPS navigator.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-40 Auto-Slewing HSI with ILS Loaded
(Shown with Corresponding Approach Plate)
NOTE: If auto CDI switching is active on the GPS unit, the GPS will force
the GPS/GDU 620 to NAV when the rotorcraft is close to the LOC course.
Appendix A
5. The CDI and course pointer will change from magenta to green and the pointer
will move, or slew, to the final approach course (or 180° from the final approach
course for LOC BC approaches).
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-29
Foreword
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Course Pointer slewed to
313° for the Backcourse
to Runway 13
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-41 Auto-Slewing HSI with Localizer Backcourse Loaded
(Shown with Corresponding Approach Plate)
2-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.8
Foreword
2.8.1
Supplemental Flight Data
Bearing Pointers
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Bearing source (GPS, NAV, or ADF)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
The Bearing Pointer is removed from the HSI if:
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• The NAV radio is tuned to a Localizer frequency
Bearing 1 Source
Bearing 2 Source
Index
Bearing 2
Bearing 1
Pointer Icon
Pointer Icon
Figure 2-42 HSI with Bearing Information
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Appendix A
CDI
Sec 8
Glossary
GPS Level
of Service
Bearing 1 Pointer
Current Navigation Source
Sec 7
Symbols
• ADF is selected and a signal is not received (if you have an ADF that supports
a valid flag then the bearing pointer will be removed. If your ADF system
does not include a valid flag then the bearing pointer will still be displayed,
regardless of ADF signal validity.)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
Bearing 2 Pointer
Sec 3
MFD
The Bearing Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI
and show:
Sec 2
PFD
When a Bearing Pointer is displayed, its associated information window is
also displayed.
Sec 1
System
Two Bearing Pointers can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources.
The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an
icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer
type. The system must be configured for a second navigation source to show the
BRG2 selection.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-31
Foreword
Sec 1
System
GPS1
GPS2
VOR1
VOR2
LOC1
LOC2
GPS Mode
GPS Advisory
LOI
Suspend
OBS
SUSP
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
MSG
LOI
CDI Source
OCN
ENR
TERM
APR
LNAV
LNAV+V
LPV
LNAV/VNAV
LP
LP+V
1.00nm
0.30nm
DR
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-43 PFD HSI Annunciations
1. Press the PFD soft key to display the navigation source keys.
2. Press the BRG 1 or BRG 2 soft keys to toggle between the available Nav
receivers of the selected source, e.g., GPS, NAV, or ADF.
NOTE: The Bearing Line for navigation source 1 (BRG1) will be a single
line. The Bearing Line for navigation source 2 (BRG2) will be a double line.
2.8.2
Temperature Display
The outside air temperature is displayed to the left of the HSI. The air
data computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and
Pitot-static inputs. The units (°C or °F) and temperature reference are selected
on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP page. The temperature reference can be selected
to one of the following choices:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
stationary (static) outside air. Conceptually, this is the temperature that
would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location.
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
outside air as it moves past the rotorcraft, including the rise in
temperature due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed.
• Difference from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) – This is the
difference between SAT and standard (ISA) temperature at the current
altitude. This provides an indication of how much warmer/colder the
temperature is from a standard atmosphere.
2-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 2-44 HSI Outside Air Temperature
2.8.3
Wind Vectors
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Style 3
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Four styles are available as shown below.
Style 2
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-45 Wind Vector with No Wind Data
Style 1
Sec 2
PFD
When selected, wind vector information is displayed in a window on the
PFD to the left of the HSI. The Wind Vector style is configured in the Aux Mode
System Setup page. When the airspeed is less than 20 knots, the Wind Vector
window will indicate “No Wind Data.”
Style 4
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-46 Wind Vector Style
DME Indication
DME Information
DME Hold Annunciation
Appendix A
Selected DME
Set Hold for Selected DME
Figure 2-47 DME Indication
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-33
Index
NOTE: The capability of providing DME information requires installation
of the GAD 43e.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 8
Glossary
When selected, DME information is displayed in a window in the lower left
corner of the PFD. The distance to the station and the Nav source used are
shown.
Sec 7
Symbols
2.8.4
Marker Beacon Annunciations
A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when
the rotorcraft flies over a marker beacon. The marker beacon annunciation will
appear to the left of the altitude tape below the terrain annunciator on the PFD.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.8.5
Sec 2
PFD
Outer Marker
Beacon Indication
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-48 Marker Beacon Location
Current Beacon
Icon (Blink)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Inner Marker
Middle Marker
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Outer Marker
Table 2-49 Marker Beacons
2.8.6
Miscompare Annunciations
Miscompare annunciations are capable of being displayed on the PFD if the
miscompare Monitor is enabled during the installation configuration.
Messages will appear in the MFD alerts window if monitors are enabled and
required data is not present.
A miscompare condition is triggered if the difference between the data
reported by GDU 1 and GDU 2 exceeds the threshold described in the following
table for at least one second.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Icon (Standard)
2-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Threshold
200 ft
Inhibited
10 kts
7 kts
5°
6°
Sec 1
System
Range of Trigger
ALL
Both IAS < 35 kts
Either IAS >= 35 kts
Either IAS >= 80 kts
ALL
ALL
Foreword
Parameter
Altitude
Indicated Airspeed
Indicated Airspeed
Indicated Airspeed
Pitch
Roll
Sec 2
PFD
Table 2-50 Miscompare Conditions
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Pitch and Roll Miscompare
Sec 3
MFD
A “MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed on the airspeed tape if a miscompare
condition exists for indicated airspeed. A “MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed
on the altitude tape if a miscompare condition exists for altitude. A “PITCH
MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare
condition exists for pitch and not roll. A “ROLL MISCOMP” annunciation is
displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for roll and
not pitch. An “ATTITUDE MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed over the pitch
ladder if a miscompare condition exists for both pitch and roll.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Altitude
Miscompare
Pitch Miscompare
Roll Miscompare
Sec 7
Symbols
Airspeed
Miscompare
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 2-51 Miscompare Annunciations
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-35
Attitude Sync
The ATT SYNC soft key toggles the miniature rotorcraft symbol between
the absolute pitch reference and the horizon line at the time the soft key is
pressed. Use of Attitude (ATT) Sync function moves the miniature rotorcraft
to the horizon line and allows rotorcraft attitude to be controlled with more
precision and less effort. When the ATT Sync function is active small reference
marks are shown on the sides of the attitude indicator that show the absolute
pitch reference. The miniature rotorcraft symbol cannot be synchronized to the
horizon line if the pitch attitude is greater than ±8º.
Pressing the ATT SYNC soft key will synchronize the rotorcraft symbol on
the PFD to the horizon line. The ATT SYNC soft key will not be available for
selection until the rotorcraft is near a level pitch attitude (within ±8º).
Attitude Sync Soft Key Label
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.9
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Attitude Sync Soft Key
Figure 2-52 Before Attitude Sync Selected
Appendix A
Figure 2-53 Before Attitude Sync Selected
Index
Figure 2-54 After Attitude Sync Selected
2-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2.10 Radar Altimeter
Sec 1
System
NOTE: See the Radar Altimeter documentation for details on the radar
altimeter performance and limitations.
Foreword
When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed, the altitude received from the
radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD.
Barometric Altitude
Sec 2
PFD
150 Feet Above Ground
Sec 3
MFD
Radar Altimeter Value
Figure 2-55 Radar Altimeter Display - 150 ft RA Altitude
Sec 5
Additional
Features
When the radar altitude is 0, the brown band will be level with the altitude
tape pointer. As the radar altitude increases above 0, the brown band will move
down the tape in an amount equal to the current radar altitude.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Brown Band Indicating Ground
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Barometric Altitude
0 Foot Difference
(On Ground)
Sec 8
Glossary
Brown Band Indicating Ground
Radar Altimeter Value
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-37
Index
The Radar Altimeter self-test process will be annunciated on the PFD above
the Radar Altimeter altitude value. The self-test is a wiring test to indicate
communication between the GDU and the Radar Altimeter. The self-test will be
cancelled after 15 seconds, the Test key is pressed again, or you leave the System
Setup page.
Appendix A
Figure 2-56 Radar Altimeter Display - 0 ft RA Altitude
1. Turn the large MFD knob to Aux mode and then turn the small MFD knob to
the System Setup page.
2. Press the RA TEST key. "RA TEST" will be annunciated above the Radar
Altimeter value. The Radar Altimeter value will show a certain number to
indicate that communication is taking place between the Radar Altimeter and
the GDU. See your Radar Altimeter documentation for the appropriate value.
Figure 2-57 Radar Altimeter Test Annunciation
3. Press the RA TEST key again to stop the self-test.
4. If the unit fails the self-test, the RA value will not match the expected value. The
"RA FAIL" annunciation will appear on the PFD when the GDU is not receiving
any Radar Altimeter data. RA FAIL is not related to the self-test.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NOTE: Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function.
Figure 2-58 Radar Altimeter Failure Annunciation
Radar Altimeter Configurations
Depending on the installation, the pilot will have one of the following options.
1. BARO or RAD ALT minimums altitude alert, pilot selectable.
• The minimums alerting value is defaulted OFF with a setting of 0 feet.
• The pilot can select alerts ON or OFF and can select the alert altitude
based on either barometric or radar altitude.
• The alert upon descending through the selected altitude is the aural
“Minimums, minimums” callout.
• The altitude required to arm the alerting is 150 feet above the selected
altitude.
Additionally, the unit may be configured by the installer for the following alerts.
• An aural “One Hundred Feet” alert is always provided when descending
through 100 ft radar altitude.
• An alert will arm as soon as the radar altitude is above 100 feet.
2-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2. RAD ALT only altitude alert, pilot selectable.
• The pilot can select alerts ON or OFF, and select the alert altitude based
on radar altitude.
Foreword
• The alerting value is defaulted ON with a setting of 200 feet.
Sec 1
System
• The alert upon descending through the selected altitude is a unique
tone.
Sec 2
PFD
• The altitude required to arm the alerting is 50 feet above the selected
altitude.
Additionally, the unit may be configured by the installer for the following alerts.
Sec 3
MFD
• An aural “One Hundred Feet” alert is always provided when descending
through 100 ft radar altitude.
• An alert will arm as soon as the radar altitude is above 100 feet.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
2-39
PFD units may be set to standard or metric units by the installer. The MFD
units may still be selected by the user in the System Setup page of Aux mode.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.11 PFD Units
2-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Map Orientation
Foreword
The Multi-Function Display (MFD) presents a color moving map with
navigation information. Moving map information is shown on the two
Navigation Map pages and the optional Weather (WX) pages. The Navigation
Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic
data (e.g., cities, lake, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading
indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g., traffic, terrain, weather). The map
options set for Navigation Map page 1 are used as the default settings for the
optional Weather (WX) pages. Which data is displayed can be controlled by the
DCLTR soft key and map page MENU selections. The Navigation Map can be
oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRACK UP),
Desired Track Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Range Select
Page Group Position
Small MFD Knob
(Select Page)
Sec 8
Glossary
SD Card Slots
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-1
Index
The nose of the rotorcraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the
location corresponding to the calculated present position. The rotorcraft
position and the flight plan legs are based on information received from the
currently selected GPS navigator. The leg of the active flight plan currently
being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map. The other
legs are shown in white.
Appendix A
Large MFD Knob
Soft Keys
Soft Key Labels
(Select Page Group)
Figure 3-1 MFD Description
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 7
Symbols
Page Group
Menu
Clear
Page Label
Enter
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
There are map ranges available, from 500 feet to 500 NM. The range
is now indicated in the box on the range ring at the 11 o-clock position
relative to the ownship. To change the map range on any map, press the
RNG keys on the right side of the bezel.
3.1
Navigation Map Pages
Map displays are used extensively in the GDU 620 to provide situational
awareness in flight. The following information can be displayed on the
Navigation Map Pages:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspace,
• Track vector
airways, land data (highways,
• Topography scale
cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
• Topography data
with names
• XM NEXRAD Weather
• Map
Pointer
information
(distance and bearing to pointer,
location of pointer, name, and
other pertinent information)
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present
position)
• XM Lightning
• XM Storm Cells
• Traffic
• Stormscope
• Top of Climb
• Terrain data (includes terrain,
obstacles, and power lines)
• Nav range ring
For details about the symbols used on the MFD, refer to section 7.
NOTE: Page Group and Page are shown at the bottom of the MFD.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
• Flight plan legs
Page
Turn Small MFD knob
Index
Page Group
Turn Large MFD knob
Figure 3-2 Page Group and Page Locator
3-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Wind Vector and Speed
TFR Data Window
Foreword
Map Orientation
Obstacles
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Traffic Icons
with Relative
Altitude and Trend
Indicator
Elevation Window
Sec 3
MFD
Aircraft Symbol
(Present Position)
Topo Scale
Map Overlay Icons
Page Location
Page Name
Default Navigation Map Page
3.1.2
Map Overlay Icons
While on any page of the MFD, you may easily return to the first Navigation
Map page of the Map group by pressing and holding the CLR key to return
to the first page (Home Page) of the Map group.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
Traffic
ADS-R/TIS-B Traffic
Figure 3-4 Map Overlay Icon Samples
Appendix A
Terrain
Sec 8
Glossary
Stormscope
Sec 7
Symbols
Overlay icons are displayed to indicate data that will be depicted on the
map pages. The icons are shown in the following figure. If the icon is not
displayed, either the menu selection is not ON to display the data or the
display range makes the data ineligible for display. If the icon has a white X
over it then the data is selected ON and the zoom scale is correct, but the
underlying data is not available for some reason. All of the icons may not be
displayed at the same time. In some cases if one feature is selected, another
icon and featuare may be disabled. The pilot should check the dedicated
page for the feature that the icon represents to determine why the data is not
available for display (e.g., fail, standby).
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3.1.1
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-3 MFD Map Description
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Symbols Indicates
Features Displayed
Obstacle
Wire Obstacle
3-3
Selecting Page Options
1. Change the fields or the setup of a page by pressing the MENU key and make
the necessary adjustments with the MFD knobs.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to select desired item.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
4. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
5. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
3.1.4
Changing the Navigation Map Range
The Range (RNG) keys on the right side of the bezel are used to change the
map display range. Pressing the
RNG key will zoom out (increasing the
displayed map range) and pressing the
RNG key will zoom in (decreasing
the displayed map range). The Map Range is shown on the outer range ring. The
map ranges available are from 250 feet to 500 NM.
3.1.5
Decluttering Map Pages
The Map Declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through
four levels of decluttering to remove map information. The declutter level is
displayed in the DCLTR soft key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.3
1. There are four levels of decluttering. DCLTR (0) shows the most detail. DCLTR-3
removes the most detail.
2. While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages, press the DCLTR soft key.
Each successive press of the DCLTR soft key will toggle through the declutter
levels. In the following table, features marked with a “•” are shown at the
indicated Declutter Level. Features shown at level 0 will be displayed at all
Declutter levels.
NOTE: Traffic is automatically decluttered from Nav Map pages when the
map scale is above 40 NM.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-5 Map Declutter Soft Key
3-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Feature
0
1
2
3
Feature
0
1
2
3
•
Intersections
•
•
•
Tower
•
•
Large City
•
TRSA
•
•
Medium City
•
ADIZ
•
•
Small City
•
Alert Areas
•
•
Small Town
•
Caution Areas
•
•
Freeways
•
Danger Areas
•
•
Highways
•
Warning Areas
•
•
Roads
•
Large Airports
•
•
•
Railroads
•
Medium Airports
•
•
•
Political Boundaries
•
Prohibited Areas
•
•
•
Traffic Symbols
•
MOAs
•
•
•
Lat/Lon Grids
•
•
Runway Labels
•
•
•
VORs
•
•
Lightning Strike Data
•
•
•
VRPs
•
•
NEXRAD Data
•
•
•
NDBs
•
•
River/Lake Names
•
•
•
•
Class B Airspace
•
•
Traffic Labels
•
•
•
•
Class C Airspace
•
•
Water Detail
•
•
•
•
Class D Airspace
•
•
Active FPL Legs
•
•
•
•
Foreword
Airways
Land/Country Text
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 7
Symbols
Panning
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The Panning Map Page function allows you to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the map scale and to examine information at
the pointer location. When you select the panning function — by pressing the
small MFD knob — a target pointer flashes on the map display. A window also
appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position
of the pointer, the ETE from your present position to the pointer, elevation at
the pointer, and bearing and distance to the pointer from your present position.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3.1.6
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 3-6 Features Shown at Each Decluttering Level
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-5
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Information is related
to the tip of the pointer
Selected Point
Present Position
Figure 3-7 Navigation Map Pointer Location Information
1. While viewing a Map, press the small MFD knob. A flashing pointer will
appear in the tip of the ownship symbol. As the arrow is moved, the measured
information is referenced to the tip of the arrow.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Map Pointer
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-8 Navigation Map Initial Pointer Location
2. Turn the large MFD knob to move the cursor horizontally. Turn the small MFD
knob to move the cursor vertically.
3. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel panning. The display will return to
the previous map view.
3.1.7
Selecting Items on the Map
When the target pointer is placed on an object, the name of that object is
highlighted (even if the name wasn’t originally displayed on the map). This
feature applies to airports, NAVAIDs, user-created waypoints, roads, lakes,
rivers — just about everything displayed on the map except route lines. When
an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint is selected on the map display, you can
review information about the item.
3-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2. Move the cursor with the small and large MFD knobs to highlight a feature.
Foreword
1. While viewing the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press the
small MFD knob to activate panning.
3. Press ENT to display information about the highlighted feature.
Sec 1
System
4. Press one of the soft keys for details of the selected topic.
5. Press the small MFD knob again to return to panning.
Measuring Distances
Sec 2
PFD
3.1.8
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The Measure Bearing/Distance function provides a quick and easy method to
determine the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation
Map.
1. While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press
MENU.
2. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight Measure Bearing/
Distance and then press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-9 Navigation Map Measure Distance Function
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Your present position will be marked as the starting reference point. To choose
a different starting reference point, turn the large or small MFD knobs to
desired point and press ENT.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-10 Measure Distance Starting Reference Point
Appendix A
4. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to move the cursor to a reference point. The
distance and bearing is displayed at the top of the display.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-7
Foreword
Ending Reference
Point position
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Ending Reference Point
Starting Reference Point
5. Press the small MFD knob to stop measuring.
3.1.9
Customizing Navigation Map Pages
The Navigation Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page
Menu. The Page Menu options include choices for Map Setup and Measure
Bearing/Distance. The Map Setup choice covers selections for Map, Weather,
Traffic, and Aviation depending on the installed equipment of a given rotorcraft.
3.1.10
Map Setup
The Map Setup selection from the Page Menu allows you to select which data
will be displayed on the map.
1. While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-11 Bearing/Distance Measurement
Figure 3-12 Navigation Map Page Menu
2. With the cursor flashing on the Map Setup option. Press the ENT key to display
the Map Setup Menu.
3-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
3. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Group (Map, Weather,
Traffic, or Aviation) and press ENT to allow editing of the selected group. The
groups shown depend on the features available for equipment installed in your
rotorcraft.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-13 Navigation Map Page Menu Map Group Selection
Map Group
Weather Group
(optional)
Traffic Group
(optional)
Aviation Group
Settings
Orientation
Direction
NEXRAD
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Traffic
Off
All Traffic
TA/PA
TA Only
Safe Taxi
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
North Up
At
Off/Range
NEXRAD
Cell Mov
Off/Range
Rwy
Extension
Range
Off/Range
Auto Zoom
On/Off
NEXRAD
Legend
On/Off
INT/NDB
Viewing
Range *
Off/Range
Land Data
On/Off
NEXRAD
Source
US/Canada
CONUS/
Regional/
Combined
***
VOR
Viewing
Range*
Off/Range
Track
Vector
Length
Off/Time
XM Ltng
Off/Range
Class B/
TMA *
Off/Range
Wind
Vector
On/Off
Stormscope
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Class C/
TCA *
Off/Range
Enhanced
Range
Ring
On/Off
Stormscope
Strike/Cell
Mode
Strike/Cell
Class D *
Off/Range
Index
Menu
Item
Appendix A
Settings
Sec 8
Glossary
Menu
Item
Sec 7
Symbols
Settings
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Menu
Item
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Settings
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Menu
Item
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-9
Settings
Menu
Item
Settings
Topo Data
On/Off
PRECIP
Data
Viewing
Range
Topo Scale
On/Off
Terrain
Data
On/Off
Obstacle
Viewing
Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Traffic Group
(optional)
Menu
Item
Settings
Aviation Group
Menu
Item
Settings
Off/Range
Restricted*
Off/Range
PRECOP
Legend
On/Off
MOA
(Military)*
Off/Range
DL LTNG
Data
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Other/
ADIZ *
Off/Range
Off/Range
TFR *
Off/Range
Power Line
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Airways
Off/Modes
Lat/Lon
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Smart
Airspace
On/Off
Field of
View**
On/Off
Show
Airspaces
All/Altitude
Selected
Alt Range
Arc
On/Off
Airspace
Labels
On/Off
VRP
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Sec 1
System
Menu
Item
Sec 2
PFD
Weather Group
(optional)
Sec 3
MFD
Foreword
Map Group
* - shown if the Aviation database is current. ** - shown if Synthetic Vision is available. *** - shown if FIS-B is
NEXRAD weather source.
Table 3-14 Navigation Map Page Menu Selections
3.1.10.1
Map Feature Options
Choose the options to determine the values for display on each Navigation
Map. The options you save will be retained until changed. The options may be
selecting by using the following procedure:
1. While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group, press the
MENU key. With Map Setup highlighted, press ENT. With the Map Group
active, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired option.
3-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
Map Orientation
Sec 1
System
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Foreword
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Navigation Map.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-15 Navigation Map Orientation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The North Up At option allows you to select the map range where at and
above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North
Up. For example, with the 500 NM value selected and the map range of the MFD
is 500 NM or more, the map orientation will automatically become North Up.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
North Up At
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-11
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Land Data
The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features, such as rivers,
roads, cities, are displayed. Topo features, traffic, terrain, and will still be
displayed, even with Land Data turned off.
Track Vector Length
When turned on, the Track Vector Length option will show a dashed line and
arrow extending from the rotorcraft icon illustrating the current Track and the
distance the rotorcraft will travel in the selected time.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Auto Zoom
With a valid flight plan, the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the
Navigation Map range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the
flight plan. If enabled, it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range
when the rotorcraft is on the ground. Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time
by manually zooming with the RNG keys or enabling OBS mode. Auto Zoom is
re-enabled during any one of the following conditions:
• The active waypoint changes during flight. (This does not include hovering.)
• The rotorcraft lands, or is between local and en-route modes.
• OBS mode is disabled.
• The Navigation Map’s Auto Zoom setting is changed.
Sec 7
Symbols
Track Vector
Aircraft Present Position
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-16 Navigation Map Track Vector
Wind Vector
The Wind Vector option when turned on will show a box in the top right
corner of the MFD indicating the wind direction and speed.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Index
Figure 3-17 Navigation Map Wind Vector Display
3-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Enhanced Range Ring
Sec 1
System
Range Ring Radius
Sec 2
PFD
Range Ring with Compass Rose
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-18 Navigation Map Range Ring
Topo Data On
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are
displayed. Traffic, Land Data, Terrain, and Obstacles will still be displayed even
with Topo Data turned off.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Topo Data
Topo Data Off
Foreword
When selected ON, the Enhanced Range Ring function provides a second
ring at 1/2 the distance of the primary ring to allow the pilot to accurately judge
the distance to objects depicted on the map.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-19 Navigation Map Topo Data
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-13
Minimum/Maximum
Range of Topography
Displayed on the Map
Sky Indication
Range of Topography
Displayed on the Map
Current Aircraft Altitude
Current Ground Level Indication
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Topo Scale
The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical
features on the Navigation Map is displayed. The scale will be located on the
right side of the display.
Terrain Data
The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the
Navigation Map. The Terrain Data Icon
will be shown when Terrain has
been selected.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-20 Navigation Map Topo Scale
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Terrain Data
Index
Terrain Data Icon
Figure 3-21 Navigation Map Terrain Data
3-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Obstacle Data Viewing Range
Sec 2
PFD
White Obstacles Are 250 feet
Or More Below Aircraft
Sec 1
System
Red Obstacles Are
At Or Above Aircraft
Foreword
The Obstacle Data Viewing Range option selects whether the Obstacle Data
is shown on the Navigation Map. Obstacles will be shown at and below the
selected map range. Map ranges above this value will not show the Obstacle
Data.
Yellow Obstacles Are Between
0 ft and 250 ft Below Aircraft
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-22 Navigation Map Obstacle Data
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Obstacle databases created for software version 7.00 or later may include
HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous
Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are power lines that have been identified
as a potential hazard to rotorcraft. The installed obstacle database type can be
verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for the contiguous
United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-15
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Lat/Lon Viewing Range
The Lat/Lon Viewing Range option selects whether Lat/Lon line is shown on
the MFD.
Figure 3-23 Navigation Map Lat/Lon Information
Field of View
The Field of View represented by the synthetic terrain data used for the
Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) option (when enabled) can be
represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page lateral image. Two dashed lines
forming a V-shape in front of the rotorcraft symbol on the MFD, represent the
forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Lat/Lon Reference
Information
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Field of View Borders
Index
Figure 3-24 Navigation Map Field of View on the MFD
3-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Selected Altitude Range Arc
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The range to altitude arc may be selected for display on the MFD navigation
map to predict where the ownship will be when it reaches the altitude selected
on the altitude alerter on the PFD. The distance from the ownship to the arc
is based on ground speed, baro altitude, selected altitude, and vertical speed.
The arc is shown when the rotorcraft is moving toward the selected altitude at a
vertical speed of at least 150 feet per minute. Depending on the zoom range and
lateral distance, the arc disappears when near the ownship icon.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected Altitude
Range Arc
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-25 Selected Altitude Range Arc
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-17
Weather Feature Options (Optional)
NOTE: For steps on how to select a weather source, refer to section
“3.1.10.1 Map Feature Options” on page 3-10.
The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you
to customize the NEXRAD Viewing Range, NEXRAD Cell Movement, and
Lightning Viewing range. Weather is an optional feature that requires a GDL
69/69A and a SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather subscription, or other weather
product (such as GFDS).
1. While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 page of the Map page group, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu.
Figure 3-26 Navigation Map Page Menu
2. With the cursor flashing on the Map Setup option, press the ENT key to display
the Map Setup Menu.
3. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Weather Group and press
ENT to allow editing of the selected group. The groups shown depend on the
features available for equipment installed in your rotorcraft.
Figure 3-27 Navigation Map Page Menu Weather Group Selection
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.10.2
3-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
Sec 3
MFD
NEXRAD Legend
Sec 2
PFD
The NEXRAD Cell Movement option selects whether NEXRAD Cell Movement
is shown on the Navigation Map.
Sec 1
System
NEXRAD Cell Movement
Foreword
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option selects whether the NEXRAD weather
products is shown on the MFD. NEXRAD weather products will be shown at
and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, NEXRAD weather will
not be shown. Map ranges above the selected value will not show the NEXRAD
weather products. Where 100 NM is selected, the NEXRAD weather products
will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-28 NEXRAD Legend Selection
Datalink Lightning Viewing Range
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The Lightning Viewing Range option selects whether the datalink provided
Lightning weather products is shown on the Navigation Map. Lightning
weather products will be shown at and below the selected map range. When
Off is selected, Lightning weather will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected,
Lightning symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-19
The XM or FIS-B NEXRAD Source selection allows the choice of the available
sources for NEXRAD weather products.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
XM/FIS-B NEXRAD Source
Figure 3-29 NEXRAD Weather Source Selection
The Stormscope Viewing Range option selects Stormscope cells or strikes are
shown on the Navigation Map. Products will be shown at and below the selected
map range. When Off is selected, cells or strikes will not be shown. Where
100 NM is selected, symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
NOTE: The selected lightning display type, cell or strike, will be shown the
same on both the Stormscope and the Map pages.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Stormscope Viewing Range
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Stormscope data is displayed on the Map Page only if rotorcraft
heading is available.
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: The G500H will display Stormscope data with or without a heading
source. If no heading source is available, the display will indicate this by
placing HDG N/A in the upper right portion of the display. If no heading is
available, the pilot must clear the strikes after each heading change.
When the Stormscope Viewing Range option has a range greater than zero,
the Stormscope cells or strikes option is made available and can determine
which type are shown on the Navigation Map.
Index
Appendix A
Strike/Cell Mode
3-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
Display Result
No traffic displayed
All types of traffic displayed
Traffic Alerts and Proximity Alerts displayed
Traffic Alerts Only displayed
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic Selection
Off
All Traffic
TA/PA
TA Only
Sec 1
System
NOTE: As a decluttering function, traffic labels will not be drawn when the
map scale is above 15 NM and traffic symbols will not be drawn when the
map scale is above 40 NM.
Foreword
3.1.10.3 Traffic Feature Options (Optional)
The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of traffic on the Navigation Map. The Traffic function
requires the installation of a compatible traffic device.
Table 3-30 Navigation Map Traffic Display Options
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-31 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Options
Appendix A
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-21
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Traffic Group active,
turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Traffic options.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Traffic Overlay
Selected Icon
Traffic Overlay
Smart Key Label
Figure 3-32 Navigation Map Traffic Overlay
3.1.10.4 Aviation Feature Options
The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of SafeTaxi information, Runway Extensions, Intersection/
NDB locations, VOR locations, and TFR icons on the Navigation Map.
Figure 3-33 Navigation Map Page Menu Aviation Group Selection
SafeTaxi Viewing Range
The SafeTaxi viewing range option selects the range at which SafeTaxi
information is shown on the Navigation Map. SafeTaxi will be shown at and
below the selected map range. When Off is selected, SafeTaxi information will
not be shown. Where 1 NM is selected, the SafeTaxi information will be shown
at map ranges of 1 NM and lower.
Runway Extension Range
The Runway Extension Range option selects the whether Runway Extensions
is shown for the flight plan destination airport runway. Runway Extensions will
be shown at and below the selected map range and will extend 10 NM. When
Off is selected, Runway Extensions will not be shown.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
When the Traffic overlay is active on a Map page, a Traffic icon will be
displayed on the Map page where it is selected.
3-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Class D Airspace Viewing Range
The Class D airspace viewing range option selects whether Class D airspace
information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class D airspace information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class D airspace
information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 3
MFD
Class C/TCA Airspace Viewing Range
The Class C/TCA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class C/TCA
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class C/TCA airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class
C/TCA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 2
PFD
Class B/TMA Airspace Viewing Range
The Class B/TMA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class B/TMA
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class B/TMA airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class B/
TMA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 1
System
VOR Viewing Range
The VOR viewing range option selects whether VOR information is shown on
the Navigation Map. VOR information will be shown at and below the selected
map range. When Off is selected, the information will not be shown.
Foreword
INT/NDB Viewing Range
The INT/NDB viewing range option selects whether Intersection and NDB
information is shown on the Navigation Map. Intersection and NDB information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-23
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Restricted Airspace Viewing Range
The Restricted airspace viewing range option selects whether the map range
is shown on the Navigation Map. Restricted airspace information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Restricted airspace information will
be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
The MOA (Military) viewing range option selects whether MOA (Military)
information is shown on the Navigation Map. MOA airspace information will
be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, MOA airspace
information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Other/ADIZ Airspace Viewing Range
The Other/ADIZ airspace viewing range option selects whether Other/ADIZ
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Other/ADIZ airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Other/
ADIZ airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
TFR Viewing Range (Optional)
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the Navigation Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, TFR information will
be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower. This optional feature requires
an active data link receiver. TFRs are provided through the datalink. Some TFRs
may exist that are not available to the datalink provider and as such will not be
displayed.
Airways
The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the
Navigation Map. All, Low only, and Hi only Airways may be selected. When Off
is selected, airways will not be shown.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
MOA (Military) Viewing Range
3-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
Smart Airspaces - Emphasized (On)
Sec 2
PFD
Smart Airspaces - De-Emphasized
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the
moving map display. It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set
on the System-Alerts portion of the system.
Foreword
Smart Airspace
The Smart Airspaces selection filters airspaces to show the ones appropriate
for your altitude. Garmin’s Smart Airspace feature aids visual clarity on-screen
by de-emphasizing airspace that’s well above or below the rotorcraft’s current
altitude. The vertical separation is 1,000 feet at sea level and the vertical
separation will gradually increase to 2,000 feet until the rotorcraft reaches
10,000 feet. Anything above 10,000 feet keeps the 2,000 feet vertical separation.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-34 Display of Smart Airspaces
(Airspace Borders Grayed When Emphasized)
Sec 8
Glossary
The Visual Reporting Points (VRPs) viewing range option selects whether VRP
information is shown on the Navigation Map. VRP information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. Where 15 NM is selected, the VRPs will be shown for map ranges
at and below 15 NM.
Sec 7
Symbols
Visual Reporting Points
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-25
Split Screen (Optional)
Current Video Source
Display of External Video Source
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 1
System
External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an
externally mounted video source on the rotorcraft. The Map Display setup will
reflect the setup for MAP PAGE 1 except that TERRAIN, TOPO, and TRAFFIC
can be turned on and off separately on this page.
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
3.1.11
Figure 3-35 External Video
1. While viewing the Map function, turn the small MFD knob to the third
Navigation Map page.
2. The External Video page will show the external video on the top half of the
MFD and a Navigation Map will be shown on the lower half.
3. To select the other external video source, press the MENU key.
4. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Video selection and then
press ENT.
Selected Video Source
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Map Display
Figure 3-36 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu
3-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2
Aux Mode Pages
3.2.1
Foreword
The Aux mode provides pages for System Setup, XM Information (if installed),
and system Status.
System Settings
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
G500H system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup Page.
The following settings can be changed:
• Display Brightness (Mode and Level)
• Airspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY)
• PFD Options (Wind Vector, Nav Status, Temp Reference, and CDI/VDI
Preview)
• Dual Unit Synchronization (CDI, Baro, and some Databases)
• Date/Time (Date, Time, Time Format, and Time Offset)
• MFD Display Units (Distance/Speed and Altitude/Vertical Speed)
• System Display Units (Navigation Angle Reference, Pressure Units, and
Temperature Units)
• Data Link (FIS, XM, GFDS)
• CDI/VDI Preview (On, Off)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-37 Aux Mode System Setup Page
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-27
NOTE: Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function.
1. While viewing the Aux mode System Setup page, press the MENU key.
Figure 3-38 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu
2. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the desired selection and then
press ENT.
3.2.1.1
Display Brightness
Display brightness mode may be set to manual or automatic. The automatic
mode will set the display brightness based on the ambient light. The manual
mode allows the setting of display brightness between 0 and 100%.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the AUX page group. Press the small MFD
knob to activate the cursor.
2. The Level will be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Display
Brightness Level and then press ENT.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
The default values set by the installer during installation are restored by using
the Page Menu options or soft keys. The Restore Unit Defaults menu selection
and the DFLT UNIT soft key restores the default MFD Display and System
Display Units settings. The Restore Airspeed Defaults menu selection or DFLT
SPD soft key restores the default PFD Airspeeds settings.
The RA TEST soft key activates the Radar Altimeter test mode. See the Radio
Altimeter section in section 2 for details.
Figure 3-39 Aux Mode Display Brightness Level Selection
3. If the Level was changed, Manual will be selected. Press the cursor to save the
settings. If you press ENT the Mode setting will be highlighted.
4. With the Mode value highlighted, turn the small MFD knob to select Auto or
Manual and then press ENT.
3-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-40 Aux Mode Display Brightness Mode Selection
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: When power is cycled, the Airspeed Reference values are reset.
During preflight, the Airspeed Reference values should be checked and set
appropriately for the current rotorcraft configuration and performance.
Sec 2
PFD
3.2.1.2
Airspeed Reference Marks
The airspeed reference marks for the PFD are adjusted with this function.
A marker will appear on the PFD Airspeed tape at the selected speed when the
value is set to ON. Default reference airspeeds are set during installation. When
power is cycled, the values you set will be reset to the default values.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-41 Airspeed References shown on PFD when activated
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-29
Foreword
PFD Options - Wind Vector
When selected, wind vector information is displayed on the PFD to the left of
the HSI. Four styles are available.
Sec 1
System
3.2.1.3
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Wind Vector value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Style 1
Style 2
Style 3
Style 4
Figure 3-42 Wind Vector Style
3. When a Wind Vector style is selected, a Wind Vector box with the chosen style
will be displayed to the left of the HSI on the PFD. When OFF is selected, the
Wind Vector box will not be displayed.
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Nav Status value.
Index
When selected, Nav Status information is displayed on the PFD either on the
top of the display (Style 1) or to the left of the HSI (Style 2).
Appendix A
PFD Options - Nav Status
Sec 8
Glossary
3.2.1.4
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT.
3-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Style 1 - Top of Display
Style 2 - Left of HSI
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-43 Nav Status Style
NOTE: Nav Status option is not available for all installations.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3.2.1.5
CDI/VDI Preview
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the coursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
CDI/VDI Preview value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. After the Nav Status style is selected, the chosen style will be displayed on the
PFD.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-31
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Temp Reference value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temp Reference type and press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3.2.1.6
Temperature Reference
The computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and
Pitot-static inputs. The units (°C or °F) and temperature reference are selected
on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP page. The temperature reference can be selected
to one of the following choices:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
stationary (static) outside air. Conceptually, this is the temperature that
would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location.
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
outside air as it moves past the rotorcraft, including the rise in
temperature due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed.
• Difference from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) – This is the
difference between SAT and standard (ISA) temperature at the current
altitude. This provides an indication of how much warmer/colder the
temperature is from a standard atmosphere.
Figure 3-44 Outside Air Temperature Selection
3.2.1.7
Synchronization
Dual GDU 620 units when connected in the rotorcraft may be set up to
communicate and share information by crossfilling or synchronizing information
between the two units. A single GDU 620 may be set up to synchronize the
database with a navigator.
Crossfill synchronization for CDI and Baro Corrections are selected in the
System Setup page of the Aux page group. Database Synchronization is managed
in the DB Sync function on the System Status page of the Aux page group.
3-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
1. While viewing the first page of the AUX page group, press the small MFD knob
and turn the large MFD knob to highlight CDI SOURCE, BARO, DATABASES, or
CHART STREAMING in the Synchronization box in both units.
NOTE: Chart Streaming appears only when the Databases option is turned on.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-45 Dual Unit Synchronization
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF.
3. Press ENT.
Selected Altitude
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Vertical Speed
Airspeed Bug Values
Airspeed Color Band Values
System Pressure Units
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The following information is always synchronized between both GDU 620
units:
• System Temperature Units
• Barometric Correction (default ON)
Appendix A
The following information can be synchronized between GDU 620s, or
changed independently, depending on the Crossfill Synchronization Settings:
• Selected CDI SOURCE (default OFF)
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-33
Index
When Barometric Correction is synchronized, any changes to the Barometric
Setting on either GDU will change it on both GDUs.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
AHRS 1 and ADC 1 will only be displayed on GDU1. AHRS2 and ADC2 will
only be displayed on GDU2.
The CDI soft key toggles between selection of GPS or VOR/LOC as the active
navigation source. In a single GDU 620 system, the GDU CDI soft key will
change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the
navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620. In a dual GDU 620 system, the CDI
keys in the navigator are disabled.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
When the CDI SOURCE is synchronized, any changes to the selected CDI
on either GDU will change it on both GDUs. Either pilot can change the OBS
course on either GPS. If the pilot selects GPS1 on the CDI and GPS1 is in OBS
mode, any course changes will move the OBS on GPS1, GDU1, and GDU2 (if
the copilot has GPS1 displayed on the CDI). Similarly, if the pilot selects GPS2
on the CDI and GPS2 is in OBS mode, any course changes will move the OBS
on GPS2, GDU1, and GDU2 (if the copilot has GPS2 displayed on the CDI).
3-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2.1.8
Date and Time
Foreword
The Date and Time options allow you to select the time to change UTC time
to local time with a time offset.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-46 Time Format and Offset
Local Daylight Savings
Time Offset
-3 hours
-4 hours
-5 hours
-6 hours
-7 hours
-8 hours
-9 hours
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Atlantic
Eastern
Central
Mountain
Pacific
Alaskan
Hawaiian
Local Standard Time
Offset
-4 hours
-5 hours
-6 hours
-7 hours
-8 hours
-9 hours
-10 hours
Sec 3
MFD
Time Zone
Table 3-47 U.S. Time Zone Offsets
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Time
Format.
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select Local 12hr, Local 24hr, or UTC and then
press ENT. When Local 12 or 24 hr mode is selected, the Time Offset value will
then be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired offset and then press ENT.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-35
Foreword
Sec 1
System
4. A Time Offset may be entered by using the large and small MFD knobs to
change the values. Press ENT after completing any changes.
5. Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments.
3.2.1.9
MFD Display Units
The MFD Display Units options allow you to select the units of measurement
conventions displayed on the MFD. Distance and Speed selections are Imperial,
Metric, or Nautical. Altitude and Vertical speed selections are Feet or Meters.
ffic information is always shown in Nautical Miles (distance) and Feet (altitude).
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
Distance and Speed (DIS, SPD) units of measurement.
Figure 3-49 Distance and Speed MFD Display Units
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select Imperial, Metric, or Nautical and then press
ENT. The Altitude and Vertical Speed units selection will now be highlighted.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select Feet or Meters and then press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-48 Date and Time Values
3-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-50 Altitude and Vertical Speed MFD Display Units
System Display Units
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
CAUTION: The Nav Angle display units (Magnetic or True) must be set to
the same type in both the GDU 620 and GPS navigators.
Sec 3
MFD
The System Display Units options allows the selection of units to display
values for Navigation Angle (Magnetic or True), Barometric Setting (inches or
Hectopascals), and Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius). Pressing the DFLT
UNIT soft key will restore the Default Unit settings.
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
System Display Units selection titled NAV ANGLE.
Sec 2
PFD
3.2.1.10
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select Magnetic or True and then press ENT.
The Barometric Pressure Setting value will now be highlighted. When True is
selected, a "T" will appear to the right of the heading value on the PFD.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-51 Nav Angle System Display Units
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-52 Barometric Setting System Display Units
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-37
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Barometric Setting units and then press
ENT. The Temperature value will now be highlighted.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-53 Temperature System Display Units
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temperature units and then press ENT.
Data Link
The Data Link WX/TFR Source menu allows users to select the source of
weather that is displayed on the MFD. Only the options that are installed will
be displayed.
Figure 3-54 WX/TFR Source Options
To select a weather source:
1. Open the System Setup page of the AUX page group.
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the WX/TFR Source field.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select XM, GFDS, or FIS-B, and then press ENT.
5. Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2.1.11
3-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2.2
SiriusXM Information (Optional)
Foreword
The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the SiriusXM
Satellite radios, service, and products when the GDL 69/69A is installed and the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is activated.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-55 SiriusXM Information
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-39
SiriusXM Entertainment Radio (Optional)
Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GDU 620 serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. SiriusXM
Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signal
from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. When enabled,
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux Mode.
The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
Channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.3
Figure 3-56 XM Entertainment Radio
A description of SiriusXM Entertainment Radio is provided in section 5 on
page 5-1.
3-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2.4
System Status
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software
version numbers for all detected system LRUs. Pertinent information on all
system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks; failed LRUs by red “X’s.” Failed LRUs should be noted and a service
center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed. Database SYNC allows a database
to be synchronized with more than two LRUs (G500H and GTNs) at once.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-57 LRU and Database Information
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-41
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the System Status page.
3. Press the LRU soft key to highlight the first item in the LRU Info window.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the items in the LRU Info window
in case more items are available than are displayed. If more items are available
than can be displayed in the window, a scroll bar will show on the right side of
the window.
5. Press the DB ACTV soft key to display the active databases.
6. Press the DB SYNC soft key to display the status of Database SYNC operations.
The synchronization happens automatically regardless of whether the soft key
is used.
3.2.4.1
Database Sync Operation
Database SYNC allows the G500H to synchronize databases from a single
unit. The pilot only needs to update a single database card and the new
databases are automatically SYNC’d through the units connected in the cockpit
and configured for Database Syncing.
The following databases can be synchronized between using Database SYNC:
• Navigation
• Chartview (when support is
added by Jeppesen)
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
• Basemap
When Database SYNC is enabled in the LRUs and a database card is inserted
that is created for Database SYNC, the G500H will coordinate with the other
LRUs in the cockpit to determine which unit has the newest databases. Once
the determination has occurred, the connected LRUs will begin to transfer
the databases. This process may take several minutes. Charts are meant to be
transferred while in-flight, before the new chart database is effective, as this
could take an hour or more. The status of the database transfers to a unit can be
viewed in the System Status function on the DB SYNC page. The G500H will
display the source of the received databases. If a database transfer is pending,
completed, or not authorized, the status will also be indicated.
3-42
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
When the transfer is complete, if there are new and current databases to be
used, and if the rotorcraft is stopped and has yet to take-off, the pilot will be
prompted with the option to restart the unit that contains the new databases.
NOTE: This feature is available in SW Versions 7.00, and later.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Restarting the G500H must only be performed when the rotorcraft
is on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted unit
will be lost for a period of time.
Sec 2
PFD
1. With the G500H turned off, insert the database card.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. On the System Status page, press the DB SYNC soft key to view the transfer
process.
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the G500H on. The Database SYNC will occur automatically in the
background. During the Database SYNC process, normal operation of the
G500H is not affected.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-58 One Database Transfer In Process and One Pending
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-43
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-59 Database Transfer Complete
Figure 3-60 Database Transfer Not Authorized and DB Sync Conflict
3-44
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4. Once all of the database transfers have completed, if the G500H determines that
at least one of the newly transferred databases is effective and the rotorcraft is
on the ground and stopped prior to a flight, a pop-up and confirmation will be
presented to restart the unit. No pop-up will appear if the rotorcraft is moving
or has been in the air since the unit was turned on.
Foreword
5. Press the Restart soft key to continue updating the database.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WARNING: The unit will reset and all GPS navigation and moving map
functions may be lost while the unit regains GPS position.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-61 System Restart - Step 1
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-45
Resolving Database Conflicts
If the G500H determines that there are multiple LRUs with the newest
cycle of a database, but they have different regions or types of that database
(i.e., Fixed-wing vs. Rotorcraft navigation database, different regions of the
navigation database, or different obstacle database types) then a database conflict
will occur. When a database conflict occurs, that database will not be SYNC’d
until the pilot resolves the conflict. Initiate the resolve conflicts function on the
unit that contains the databases which the pilot wishes to use. These databases
will then be sent to other units.
1. Press the DB SYNC soft key, and then select the Resolve Conflicts function
on the LRU with the desired databases.
Figure 3-62 Database Conflicts
2. Select YES to continue and push the database to all other LRUs.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.4.2
3-46
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
3. Once sync’d, the desired database will be SYNC’d to the other LRUs and
“Initiating” will be displayed on the Sync Conflicts window.
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-63 Confirm Database Sync
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-64 Database Conflicts Resolved (Initiating)
Chart Streaming
Appendix A
While the chart database is synchronizing in the background, the GDU will
stream individual charts to other compatible displays. This enables all Garmin
displays to use the latest chart database information even though the database
is currently installed only on a single unit. Chart Streaming will not begin until
after the chart database has begun synchronizing.
Sec 8
Glossary
3.2.4.3
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-47
ADS-B/FIS-B Status (Optional)
When an optional ADS-B/FIS-B receiver is installed, the ADS-B/FIS-B Status
page will show the status of satellite communications, FIS-B weather products,
and the traffic applications.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.5
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-65 ADS-B/FIS-B Status Page
3-48
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2.6
External Video (Optional)
External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an
externally mounted video source on the rotorcraft.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the Aux page group.
Foreword
2. The External Video page is the first page in the Aux page group.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Display of External Video Source
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Current Zoom Level
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Current Setup Values For
The Selected Video Source
Sec 7
Symbols
Video Source Selections
Video Source Setup
Full Screen Mode
Figure 3-66 External Video
Select Video Source
2. Touch the Video 2 soft key to select Video 2 source for viewing and setup.
Appendix A
If more than one video source is available, the Video 1 and Video 2 soft keys
will be available at the bottom of the display.
1. Touch the Video 1 soft key to select Video 1 source for viewing and setup.
Sec 8
Glossary
3.2.6.1
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-49
Foreword
Sec 1
System
3.2.6.2
Zoom
1. While viewing the External Video function, press the Up Rng Arrow key to
increase the zoom up to 10x magnification. Zoom level is made through digital
magnification.
2. Press the Down Rng Arrow key to decrease the zoom level down to a
minimum of 1x.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob clockwise to pan up (the map will move down).
3. Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to pan down (the map will move
up).
4. Turn the large MFD knob clockwise to pan to the right (the map will move left).
5. Turn the large MFD knob counterclockwise to pan to the left (the map will
move right).
6. Press the small MFD knob to exit panning.
3.2.6.4
Setup
The display of each video source is set up individually.
1. While viewing the External Video page, press the soft key for the desired Video
source (Video 1 or Video 2).
2. Press the Setup soft key.
3. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Use the following directions
for each value.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2.6.3
Panning
1. While viewing the External Video function, press the small MFD knob to
activate panning.
Sec 3
MFD
3. Pressing the FULL soft key toggles between a half and full page view.
Figure 3-67 External Video Setup
4. After selecting the desired settings, press the small MFD knob or the Setup
soft key to exit editing.
3-50
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 1
System
2. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the small MFD knob to
adjust the Brightness value.
Foreword
Brightness Adjustment
1. While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-68 External Video Brightness Adjustment
3. After selecting the desired setting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Sec 3
MFD
Contrast Adjustment
1. While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Contrast value. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Contrast
value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-69 External Video Contrast Adjustment
3. After selecting the desired setting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Sec 8
Glossary
Saturation Adjustment
1. While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-51
Index
2. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the large MFD knob
to highlight the Saturation value. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the
Saturation value.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3. After selecting the desired setting, press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
3.2.6.5
Restore Defaults
The Restore Defaults selection will return the Brightness, Contrast, and
Saturation values to their original settings.
1. While viewing the External Video page, press the MENU key.
Figure 3-71 Restore Video Defaults Menu Selection
2. Restore Defaults will be highlighted. Press the ENT key.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-70 External Video Saturation Adjustment
3-52
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1. While viewing the External Video page, press the FULL key.
Foreword
3.2.6.6
Full Screen
The Full selection allows selection of the part of the video information for
display.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected Display Area
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Window of the
Selected Display Area
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Full Screen Mode
Figure 3-72 Full Video Selection
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the selection window.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the large MFD key to move the selection window.
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Press the small MFD knob to accept the selected display area shown in the
window.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-53
Foreword
3.2.7
Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits
them over the Iridium® Satellite Network at a given interval through the GSR 56.
Sec 3
MFD
Status
The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the
status of the reporting system.
NOTE: The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after
power up of the GDU. As a result, for that period, the product info for the
GSR 56 will show "Waiting."
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3.2.7.1
Time Until Transmit
The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the time
until the next data transmission. This field is blank when the rotorcraft is on the
ground.
Countdown Time Until Transmit
Figure 3-73 Position Reporting Time Until Transmit
Position Reporting Status
Position Reporting will be enabled when the rotorcraft is in the air.
Status
Idle
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Position Reporting (Optional)
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Initializing
Transferring
Unavailable
Description
The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at
this time.
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
A position report is currently being transmitted.
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system.
Table 3-74 Position Reporting Status
3.2.7.2
Report Type
Index
Standard
When the Standard reporting type is used, the Position Reporting Period may
be set to Off or Automatic. The Automatic Position Reporting Period can be set
to intervals of 2 to 60 minutes.
3-54
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2. Press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type.
Foreword
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Position Reporting page.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Standard and then press the ENT key.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-75 Select Standard Reporting
4. The Position Reporting Period type will now be selected. Turn the small MFD
knob to highlight Off or Automatic and then press the ENT key. The Position
Reporting Period interval will now be selected.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
5. Turn the small MFD knob to select the reporting frequency.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-76 Select Standard Reporting Period Frequency
Sec 8
Glossary
6. Press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
SEND Soft Key Label
Index
SEND Soft Key
Figure 3-77 Press SEND to Override the Reporting Period
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Appendix A
7. With the Standard Reporting Type, the reporting period may be manually
overridden by pressing the SEND soft key to send data.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-55
The G500H system, when combined with a GSR 56 Iridium datalink, can
send position reports that contain data as required by the U.S. Government
Automated Flight Following (AFF) system. The GSR 56 account will allow
configuration to forward data to the Automated Flight Following system.
1. While viewing the Position Reporting function, press the small MFD knob to
select the Report Type.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight AFF and then press the ENT.
Figure 3-78 Select Automatic Flight Following (AFF) Reporting Type
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select Off or the default Every 2 Min value.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Automatic Flight Following
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-79 Select AFF Reporting Period Frequency
3-56
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2.8
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)
Status
Status
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Dialing
Incoming Call
Hanging Up
Unavailable
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Changing Volume
Busy
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Initializing
Connected
Connecting Call
Sec 3
MFD
Idle
Description
The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for
communicating at this time.
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
The GSR 56 is connected to the called number.
The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the
called number.
The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing.
The phone is in use by another service and the call may
not be made.
The GSR 56 is dialing the called number.
A call is being made to the GSR 56.
The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call.
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium
phone system.
Sec 2
PFD
The Status section shows the Call Time, Phone Status, and Call Suppression
selected. The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current
call using the Iridium phone. Phone Status shows the current operating status
of the Iridium phone.
Sec 1
System
3.2.8.1
Foreword
Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium
satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56.
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 3-80 Iridium Phone Status
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-57
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is
allowed.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Iridium Phone page.
2. Press the small MFD knob to select the Call Suppression type.
Status
Off
Description
Call Suppression is turned off. Calls may be transmitted and
received through the Iridium phone.
On
Call Suppression is turned on. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
On During APR/ Call Suppression is turned on during Approach, Missed Approach,
MAPR/TERM and Terminal operations. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired selection.
Figure 3-82 Select Call Suppression
4. Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 3-81 Call Suppression
3-58
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.2.8.2
Managing the Phone Book
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. If items already exist in the catalog, turn the large MFD knob to select the
Phone Book Catalog icon. Then, turn the small MFD knob to display the
contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the New Entry selection and
press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the Name item in the Phone Book. The Name field will blink.
Sec 1
System
Creating Phone Number Names
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Iridium Phone page.
Foreword
The Phone Book is stored on the SD card in the bottom slot. The Phone Book
will only be available for use when the SD card is in the bottom slot. The Phone
Book may hold up to 128 entries. A phone number may be entered and dialed
without saving it to the Phone Book. Note that it is necessary to dial a “1,” the
area code, and then the number.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
New Entry Selected for
Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-83 New Entry Selected for Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 7
Symbols
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the name and then turn
the large MFD knob to select the next character. When the name is complete,
press the ENT key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Index
Figure 3-84 Phone Book Name Entry
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Phone Book
Catalog
Entry Name
3-59
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Creating Phone Numbers with the Rotary Knobs
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the Phone Number field. Turn the small MFD knob
to select the first character of the number and then turn the large MFD knob
to select the next character. When the number is complete, press the ENT key.
Phone Book
Catalog
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Entry Number
Figure 3-85 Phone Book Number Entry
2. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor.
Creating Phone Numbers with Soft Keys
1. Numbers may also be entered using the soft keys at the bottom of the display.
Press the Keys key at the bottom of the display.
Press To Use Keys
For Number Entry
Figure 3-86 Phone Book Number Entry Using Hot Keys
2. Press the key for the group of desired numbers.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Press To Use Keys
For Number Entry
3-60
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Press for
Press for
Press for
numbers 1, numbers 5, numbers 9 and
2, 3, and 4 6, 7, and 8 0, and symbols
* and #
Figure 3-87 Selecting Numeric Groups for Phone Book Number Entry
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Phone Book icon.
When Highlighted,
turn small MFD
knob to view list.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selecting a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
Sec 3
MFD
Press Keys For
Number Entry
Figure 3-88 Selecting Individual Numbers for Phone Book Number Entry
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the key for the desired number. Repeat as necessary and then press ENT
when the number is complete.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-89 Selecting the Phone Book Catalog
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected Phone
Book Catalog Entry
Figure 3-90 Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry
Appendix A
3. Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-61
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry. Press ENT to select the catalog entry.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the DELETE key. Press ENT to delete the
catalog entry. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor.
Editing a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry. Press ENT to select the catalog entry.
3. Use the large MFD and small MFD knobs to make changes to the name or
number. Press ENT to save the changes. Press the small MFD knob again to
cancel the selection cursor.
3.2.8.3
Phone Volume
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Rotary Knobs
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, press the small MFD knob and then
turn the large MFD knob to select the Volume control. The volume bar graph
will blink when selected.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to set the desired volume level.
3. Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls
you hear. Volume controls will only be available when the Idle, Connected, or
Changing Volume states are displayed.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Deleting a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
3-62
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Press to Dial
Selected
Number
Press to Select
Volume Keys
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-91 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
Sec 1
System
Phone Volume
Level Bar Graph
Foreword
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, press the VOL key at the bottom of the
display.
2. Press the + or – keys as necessary to adjust the phone volume.
Sec 3
MFD
Press to
Attenuate
or Mute
Press to
Decrease
Phone Volume
Press to
Increase Phone
Volume
Press to Show
Previous List of
Soft Keys
3. Pressing the ATT soft key will attenuate the volume. Press the ATT soft key
again to return to the previous volume.
Sec 8
Glossary
3. After completing the call, press the HANG UP key.
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Press the DIAL key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3.2.8.4
Making a Phone Call
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, enter a phone number or select one
from the Phone Book catalog.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-92 Using Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Press to Dial
Selected
Number
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-63
Answering a Phone Call
An incoming phone call will generate a pop-up announcing the call. When
a call is accepted, the pop-up will show that the call is connected and the
cumulative call time will be shown.
1. When an incoming call is available, press the ENT key or the ANSWER soft
key to answer the call. Or, press the CLR key or the HANG UP soft key to not
answer the call and hang up.
Figure 3-93 Incoming Call Pop-Up
2. After a called is accepted and connected, the connection time will be shown
on the pop-up. Press the ATT soft key to attenuate the call volume; pressing
it again will return to normal volume. Press the HANG UP soft key to end the
call. Press the VOL - or VOL + keys to adjust the call volume.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.8.5
Figure 3-94 Connected Call Pop-Up
3-64
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.3
Flight Plan Pages
Use the Flight Plan page group to view details about your flight plan route.
The Flight Plan Function shows the Current Flight Plan that is active in the
navigation source displayed on the CDI.
Foreword
3.3.1
Sec 1
System
Active Flight Plan Page
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Graphic METARs
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Digital Chart
Available
For Waypoint
Sec 3
MFD
DTK, Distance, and ETA
from the Previous Leg
Sec 2
PFD
The Active Flight Plan box shows all of the legs of your flight plan with
the current leg indicated in magenta. Listed are each leg with the Desired
Track (DTK), Distance (DIS), and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) for the legs.
METARs are shown for waypoints in the flight plan. In the Minimums window,
the source and selected value are shown. See section 2.4.4 on Minimum Descent
Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) in the PFD section and section 3.3.1.3
for more detail. In the Active Leg Info box in the lower part of the display, the
Course with beginning and ending waypoints, Active Leg En Route Safe Altitude
(ESA), and Route ESA are shown. METAR information is in section 4.
Current Leg
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Flight Plan Legs
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Baro
Minimums
Window
Active Leg
Window
Index
Figure 3-95 Flight Page 1 (Active Flight Plan)
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-65
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3.3.1.1
Active Flight Plan Detail
The active flight plan is shown on the first page of the Flight Plan page group.
Further information may be available for each waypoint as shown by the INFO
or WX soft keys. The WX soft key will only appear if a data link receiver is
installed and there is a Weather subscription.
1. Press the MFD knob and then use the large and small MFD knobs to highlight
waypoints in the flight plan.
2. Press the INFO soft key, if available, to view information about the highlighted
waypoint.
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
3.3.1.2
Active Flight Plan Options
The Active Flight Plan page provides information for the flight plan currently
in use for navigation.
To change data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Change Fields and then press ENT.
Figure 3-96 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press the WX soft key, if available, to view XM weather information about the
highlighted waypoint.
Figure 3-97 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Change Fields Option Selection
3-66
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired data item and press ENT.
To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page:
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Restore Defaults and then press ENT.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window.
Foreword
5. Press the small MFD knob to remove the cursor.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-98 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection to Restore Defaults
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. With the Minimums Source highlighted, select the Altitude Minimums Alerter
source with small MFD knob.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.3.1.3
Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts
(if interfaced to an audio panel) when approaching the Selected Altitude. See
2.4.4 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting section of the PFD
section for more details.
1. While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group, press the Menu key.
With the Set Minimums item highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-99 Minimums Source Selection
Appendix A
Figure 3-100 Minimums Altitude Selection
Index
4. Press ENT to activate the selected value.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-67
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and
press the CLR key, it will turn the minimums functionality off.
3.3.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Waypoint Information Page
The Waypoint Information page provides details about a particular waypoint.
You can show a waypoint by selecting it by Ident, Facility Name, or by City.
The Map window shows the selected waypoint in the center of the map. The
Range keys zoom in and out on the map. The Info window at the bottom of
the display shows the Bearing and Distance from your present position to the
selected waypoint as well as its region and Lat/Lon coordinates.
Facility Identifier
Facility Name
Facility Location
Facility Type
Bearing & Distance
to Wpt from
Present Position
Map Region
Lat/Lon
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
Map Window
Wpt Weather
Info Soft Key
Airport Directory Soft Key
Rwy/Freq Soft Key
Figure 3-101 Flight Plan Waypoint Information Page
Info/Map Soft Key
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Map Orientation
Index
NOTE: Waypoint information is shown on the second page of the Flight
Plan page group.
3-68
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
3.3.2.1
Selecting a Waypoint
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press
the MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to
select the identifier for the waypoint.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-102 Waypoint Selection
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Press the ENT key to select the waypoint.
OR
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
small MFD knob.
2. Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-103 Waypoint Category Selection
3. Turn the small MFD knob to show FPL, NRST, or RECENT.
4. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired airport, and then press ENT.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-69
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-104 Heliport Waypoint Information Page
OR
1. While viewing the Nav Map 1 or 2 pages of the MAP page group, press the
MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to
highlight the identifier for a waypoint.
Index
Selected
Waypoint
Selection
Cursor
Figure 3-105 Waypoint Selection
2. Press the ENT key to select the waypoint.
3-70
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.3.2.2
Waypoint/Runway/Frequency Information Detail
Foreword
Sec 1
System
More detailed information about a selected waypoint is available by pressing
the RWY/FREQ or APT DIR soft keys on the Waypoint Information page.
The current destination waypoint is the default item shown. You may select
a different Ident, Facility, or Location. In the Runway window, you may view
information about the runways. In the Frequency window, a scroll bar is shown
on the right side of the window when more frequencies are available.
Sec 2
PFD
Facility
Information
Window
Sec 3
MFD
Runway
Information
Window
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Airport
Frequency
Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-106 Flight Plan Waypoint Info Detail
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-71
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Access (Public/
Private and
Symbol)
Identifier
Facility Name
City
Figure 3-107 Flight Plan Ident/Facility/City Detail
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press
the RWY/FREQ, APT DIR, or WX soft keys to view information about the
waypoint.
2. The current destination Ident, Facility, and City is shown, but may be changed
to find information about other choices. Press the small MFD knob to activate
the cursor. These fields may not be selected if the RWY, APT DIR, or WX pages
are selected. If viewing those pages, press the soft key for that page again to
return to the Waypoint Information page.
3. Use the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change and use the
small MFD knob to change the value.
4. Press the ENT key to save the selected value or press the small MFD knob to
cancel editing.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Ident/Facility/City Selection
The current destination Identifier, Facility Type with icon, Facility Name, and
City (location) are shown in the top window of the Flight Plan mode Waypoint
Information page. The default is the Nearest airport if there is no active flight plan.
New Identifiers may also be selected as shown in section 3.3.2.3.
3-72
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Arrow Indicates
More Runways
Runway Surface
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Runway Number
Runway Length
& Width
Pilot-Controlled
Lighting Frequency
Figure 3-108 Waypoint Runway Information
Foreword
Runway Information Selection
Information is provided for each runway showing the following detail:
runway number, runway length, surface type, and the frequency for PilotControlled Lighting (PCL).
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel editing.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Frequency window at the bottom of the Waypoint Information page
shows the frequencies available for the selected waypoint. A scroll bar is shown
on the right side of the Frequency window if more frequencies are available.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Facility Frequency Selection
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Use the large MFD knob to highlight the Runway and use the small MFD knob
to display the available runways.
Sec 3
MFD
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
RWY/FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and press the
small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-109 Waypoint Frequency Information
Appendix A
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
RWY/FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and then press
the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the available frequencies.
Index
3. Press the small MFD knob to exit.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-73
The Airport Directory lists extensive information about the selected airport
and the surrounding area. The RWY/FREQ and APT DIR soft keys are inactive
unless the selected waypoint is an airport or heliport.
NOTE: Airport Directory information comes from a database provided by
various 3rd parties. Refer to the Database information in the AUX – SYSTEM
STATUS page for details on the installed Airport Directory database.
Figure 3-110 Airport Directory Information
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
APT DIR soft key to view more information about the waypoint.
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
3. Use the small or large MFD knob to scroll through the information.
4. Press the small MFD knob to deactivate the cursor. Press the APT DIR soft key
again to return to the Waypoint Information page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Airport Directory
Sec 1
System
3.3.2.3
3-74
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
3.3.2.4
Waypoint Weather Information (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Weather information function is available if a data link receiver is
installed and weather information is available for the selected waypoint. METAR
and TAF text are displayed on the Waypoint Weather Information Page. Pressing
the WX/NOTAM soft key will show the weather information page. Highlighting
the Product selection and turning the small MFD knob will display METAR
data, TAF information, and NOTAMs as they are available. NOTAMs are also
available when FIS-B is available.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-111 Waypoint Weather Information (Textual METARs and TAFs)
3. Press the small MFD knob to return to the main Flight Plan page.
Charts Page (Optional)
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
3-75
Index
When the Chart function is available, charts will be shown on the third page
of the Flight Plan page group.
For more information, refer to section 5.1.
Appendix A
3.3.3
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available
information.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
3-76
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sec 1
System
This section is divided into the following groups:
Foreword
The G500H hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory
information of potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
Terrain Avoidance
Sec 2
PFD
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-HSVT (Optional)
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Avoidance
• Traffic Advisory System (Optional)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
(Optional - GTX 33/330 Transponder required)
• ADS-B (Optional - ADS-B/FIS-B receiver required)
• GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Weather (Optional)
• GFDS Weather with the Iridium satellite system through GSR 56 Optional)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• FIS-B Weather with ADS-B/FIS-B receiver (Optional)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Weather
• Stormscope (Optional)
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-1
Terrain Configurations
Garmin provides the following terrain awareness and alerting solutions
within the G500H environment:
• Terrain-HSVT - Refers to a subset of H-TAWS that meets the terrain alerting
requirements outlined in Appendix G of AC 20-167. Terrain-HSVT is a
subset of H-TAWS that provides a FLTA functionality, including visual
alerting and aural alerting. Terrain-HSVT is provided with the Synthetic
Vision functionality and not marketed separately.
NOTE: Terrain-HSVT is not a fully functional HSVT and does not meet the
TAWS TSO-C194 requirements.
• Terrain-Proximity - Refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations
on the moving map. No aural alerts of any type are provided by a
Terrain-Proximity configuration.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.1
4-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.1.1
Terrain System Self-Test
Aural
Callouts
-
G500H
G500H
G500H
G500H
GNS
-
-
GNS
GTN
GTN
GTN
GTN
-
-
-
3rd-party
HTAWS
Sec 5
Additional
Features
-
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
-
Sec 3
MFD
-
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Terrain Proximity
w/no other system
SVT w/no other
system
Terrain Proximity
or SVT w/GNS
HTAWS [3] [5]
Terrain Proximity
or SVT w/
GTN HTAWS or
HTerrain Alerting
[2] [3] [4]
Terrain Proximity
or SVT w/3rdparty HTAWS [5]
PFD
Annunciator
Text
4-3
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Table 4-1 G500H Terrain Annunciations
Sec 8
Glossary
[1] HSVT Terrain/Obstacle shading is only available when HSVT is enabled and displayed.
[2] Some installations with GTN may behave according to the “GNS” row, depending on configuration.
[3] If the GNS or GTN alerting source is not available but Synthetic Vision is enabled, the G500/G600 will
revert to the “Synthetic Vision w/no other system” row. An advisory message will indicate when reversion
to Terrain-HSVT alerting has occurred.
[4] For GTN HTAWS, GTN v5.10 or later and GDU v7.00 or later are required. (For prior versions, see the
“Synthetic Vision w/GNS HTAWS” row.) For GTN HTerrain Alerting, GTN v6.50 or later and GDU v7.30 or
later are required.
[5] Prior to GDU v7.00, HSVT Shading and MFD Alerts were generated by the G500H when Synthetic Vision
was enabled and a GNS HTAWS or 3rd-party HTAWS was installed and generating the PFD Annunciation
and Aural Callouts.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 1
System
Terrain
Configuration
Alert Source
HSVT
MFD
Terrain/
Terrain/
Obstacle
Obstacle
Shading [1]
Alerts
Foreword
During power-up of the GDU 620, the terrain/obstacle database versions are
displayed along with a disclaimer. At the same time, the Terrain system self-test
begins. A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails (a message will not be
issued for Terrain Proximity).
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
GNS/GTN HTAWS may be provided by a GNS 500WT-series or GTN-series
navigator with HTAWS. The GNS/GTN HTAWS must be interfaced to the
G500H as GPS 1. Each of the terrain awareness configurations are detailed in
the following sections.
4.2
Terrain Proximity
Garmin Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C194-certified terrain awareness
system provided as a standard feature of GDU 620 to increase situational
awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Terrain may be
displayed on the Map page group Navigation Map and Terrain pages.
Terrain Proximity uses information provided from the GPS receiver to
provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude). GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors
such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and
temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude
does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore,
GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to
calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
Terrain Proximity utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced
to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude, Terrain
Proximity displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the rotorcraft. In this manner, Terrain Proximity
provides awareness of surrounding terrain conditions.
Terrain-Proximity - is a non-TSO-C194 certified terrain awareness system. Do
not confuse Terrain Proximity with H-TAWS. H-TAWS is TSO-C194 certified and
Terrain Proximity is not. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations
or voice alerts, it only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and
obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from the rotorcraft.
Terrain-HSVT is a non-TSO-C194 certified terrain awareness system. Do
not confuse Terrain-HSVT with H-TAWS. H-TAWS is TSO-C194 certified
and Terrain-HSVT is not. Terrain-HSVT provides terrain alerting functionality,
including visual alerting and aural alerting. Terrain-HSVT is provided with the
Synthetic Vision functionality and not marketed separately. Garmin TerrainHSVT is available in GDU 620 v4.00 or later, when configured for Rotary Wing
and Synthetic Vision enabled.
4-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Terrain Proximity requires the following to operate properly:
Terrain Proximity Limitations
Terrain System Status
Sec 7
Symbols
The Terrain system continually monitors several system-critical items, such
as database validity, hardware status, and GPS status. Should the system detect a
failure, a failure message will be displayed.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4.2.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the
data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. The displayed information should never be understood as being
all-inclusive.
Sec 3
MFD
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database
that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain information should be used as an aid
to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
terrain.
Sec 2
PFD
Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of
the rotorcraft. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database.
However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be
inaccurate. Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
obstacles.
Sec 1
System
4.2.1
Foreword
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-5
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.2.3
Displaying Terrain Proximity
The Terrain Proximity page is in the Map page group. Terrain is also selectable
on the Navigation Map pages.
4.2.3.1
Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group.
3. Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the Terrain page.
Figure 4-2 Terrain Page with VIEW Soft Key to reach 360° and 120° Arc Soft Keys
Altitude
Information
North Indication
Arc View
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Map Orientation
Sec 7
Symbols
Ownship Symbol
at Present Position
Terrain and
Obstacle
Altitude
Legend
Sec 8
Glossary
Page Name
Appendix A
Press View to Display the Arc and 360°
Range Ring Selections
Index
Figure 4-3 Terrain Page with Aviation Data Displayed and 360° View
4-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Terrain Overlay
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain Data Icon
4.2.3.2
Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group.
NOTE: Terrain Proximity and NEXRAD are mutually exclusive on the map
page.
Sec 8
Glossary
4.2.3.3
Terrain Proximity Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-7
Index
1. Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys.
2. Press the 360 or Arc soft key.
OR
1. Press MENU and the with the View Arc or View 360° selection highlighted
press ENT.
Appendix A
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360/Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Press the TERRAIN soft key to overlay terrain on the Navigation Map.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. On Navigation Map page 1 or 2, press the MAP soft key to show the TERRAIN
soft key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-4 Terrain on Navigation Map Page
Foreword
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-5 Terrain Page Menu Viewing Selections
4.2.3.4
Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data
The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on
the Terrain page.
1. While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-6 Terrain Page with 360° Rings and 120° Arc
Figure 4-7 Show/Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain Page
2. Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
4-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Terrain Overlay
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Terrain Data Icon
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-8 Navigation Map Page with Terrain Data Displayed
Terrain Proximity Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Terrain Proximity uses colors and symbols to depict terrain, obstacles, and
potential impact points. Amber (caution) and red (warning) indicate terrain and
obstacle alerts relative to rotorcraft altitude. These colors adjust automatically as
the rotorcraft altitude changes.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.2.4
Terrain/Obstacle Altitude Legend
Sec 7
Symbols
The Terrain/Obstacle legend is displayed at the bottom right corner of the
Navigation Map. This option is available in the Map page group.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-9 Terrain/Obstacle Altitude Legend
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-9
Color
Foreword
Black
Green
Sec 1
System
Yellow
Orange
Red
Description
Terrain is more than 500 ft below the rotorcraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft below and 500 ft below the rotorcraft
Terrain is between 250 ft below and 0 ft above the rotorcraft
Terrain is between 0 ft above and 250 ft above the rotorcraft
Terrain is more than 250 ft above the rotorcraft
Sec 2
PFD
Table 4-10 Terrain Altitude Color Descriptions
Sec 3
MFD
Terrain is more than 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude (Red)
Terrain is between
0 ft and 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude
(Orange)
250 ft
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
250 ft
500 ft
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Figure 4-11 Terrain Altitude Colors
Obstacle Icons
NOTE: If an obstacle or terrain cell and the projected flight path of the
rotorcraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat
location on the Terrain Proximity page.
With the exception of power lines, any number of obstacles within close
proximity of each other may display as a group on the Navigation Map. The
MFD groups obstacles when they would otherwise overlap at the current zoom
scale. When a group is drawn, only the most immediate threat is depicted. An
asterisk at the upper left of an obstacle indicates that it is a group. The relative
altitude of the highest obstacle in the group determines the asterisk’s color.
To view obstacles individually, increase the current zoom scale.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Green)
4-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Icon
Description
Foreword
Unlighted Obstacle (height is less than 1,000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle (height is less than 1,000 ft AGL)
Sec 1
System
Unlighted Obstacle (height is greater than 1,000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle (height is greater than 1,000 ft AGL)
Sec 2
PFD
Windmill
Sec 3
MFD
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Table 4-12 Obstacle Icon Types
Red
Yellow
Obstacle is at or above current rotorcraft altitude
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft below current rotorcraft altitude
White
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more, below current rotorcraft altitude
Obstacles are removed when more than 500 ft below the helicopter
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Description
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Color
Table 4-13 Obstacle Altitude Color Descriptions
Sec 7
Symbols
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
250 ft
Sec 8
Glossary
250 ft
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Appendix A
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
Figure 4-14 Obstacle Altitude Colors
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-11
External H-TAWS
If a GNS 500WT-series with HTAWS or a GTN-series with HTAWS or HTerrain
Alerting is interfaced as GPS 1, text alerts generated by the GNS/GTN display
on the PFD. Other visual alert depictions may appear on the PFD and/or MFD,
depending on the configuration. See Section 4.1. Refer to the 400W/500Wseries Garmin Optional Displays Pilot’s Guide Addendum (p/n 190-00356-30)
for more information regarding these alerts.
HTAWS is an alerting system. The system does NOT guarantee successful
recovery from a conflict due to factors such as pilot response, rotorcraft
performance, and database limitations. No standardized recovery technique
is defined as recovery maneuvers may vary. HTAWS shall NOT be used for
navigation purposes.
H-TAWS annunciations received from the GNS 400W/500W Series H-TAWS
unit will be displayed to the left and aligned with the top of the Altitude Tape on
the G500H PFD. A new annunciation will flash for approximately five seconds.
• HTAWS annunciations can only be received from the #1 GNS unit if
multiple GNS units are installed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.3
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• If the #1 GNS unit is powered OFF the G500H will revert to Terrain
HSVT alerting if equipped with synthetic vision.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
• Depending on configuration, some installations with a GTN-series unit
generate terrain impact points on the MFD from crossfilled GTN data.
Index
Figure 4-15 H-TAWS Annunciations from a 400W/500W-series Unit
NOTE: H-TAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as black text on a yellow
background; H-TAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as white text on a red
background.
4-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.4
Terrain-HSVT (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Garmin Terrain-HSVT refers to a subset of H-TAWS that meets the terrain
alerting requirements outlined in Appendix G of AC 20-167. Terrain-HSVT
is a subset of H-TAWS that provides a FLTA functionality with visual alerting
and aural alerting. Terrain-HSVT is provided with Garmin Synthetic Vision
Technology (SVT™) functionality and not provided separately.
Terrain-HSVT alerting consists of the following alert types:
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
Sec 8
Glossary
• Helicopter Obstacle Database
Sec 7
Symbols
• 6 arc-second Terrain Databases
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
To function properly Terrain-HSVT requires the use of databases specific to
helicopters and Terrain-HSVT. The databases required are:
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Terrain-HSVT utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to
mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude, TerrainHSVT displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the rotorcraft. The GPS position and GPS-MSL
altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the rotorcraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, Terrain-HSVT can
provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. Detailed alert
modes are described later in this section.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain-HSVT is available in G500H GDU 620 SW version 4.00, and later.
Sec 3
MFD
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
Alerting
Sec 2
PFD
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting which consists of:
• Aviation Database including Heliports
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-13
Terrain-HSVT Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360/Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu.
Figure 4-16 Terrain-HSVT 360 and Arc Views
1. Press the VIEW soft key and then the 360 or Arc soft key.
OR
1. Press MENU and the with the "View Arc" or "View 360°" selection highlighted
press ENT.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.4.1
Index
Figure 4-17 Terrain-HSVT Page Menu Viewing Selections
4-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.4.2
Terrain-HSVT Page Aviation Data
Foreword
Select the display of Aviation data on the Garmin Terrain-HSVT page. The
Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the
Terrain or the Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-18 Terrain-HSVT Hide and Show Aviation Data
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1. While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map
Setup options for the Navigation Map pages.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-19 Show/Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain-HSVT Page
2. Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-15
Foreword
Inhibiting/Enabling Terrain-HSVT Alerting
Terrain-HSVT has an inhibit mode that deactivates the aural and visual
alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting Terrain-HSVT and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate.
Sec 1
System
4.4.3
When Terrain HSVT is inhibited the following terrain alerts functions are
inhibited:
Sec 2
PFD
• Aural Alerts
• Pop up alert on MFD
Sec 3
MFD
• Annunciator on PFD
• Terrain warning and caution shading on PFD synthetic terrain
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: See RFM for guidance on inhibiting Terrain-HSVT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-20 Terrain-HSVT Alerting Disabled (Alerts Inhibited) Annunciation (PFD & MFD)
1. In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the HTerrain SVT Page.
2. Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable Terrain SVT (choice dependent
on current state).
OR
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
1. Press the MENU key.
Figure 4-21 Select Inhibit Terrain-HSVT Alerting
(Alerts Will Be Inhibited)
4-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.4.4
Terrain-HSVT Reduced Protection Mode
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Reduced Protection (RP) mode functionality allows operating with a reduction
in the alerting thresholds, and suppresses visual and aural annunciation of
caution alerts. Reduced protection allows low level operations and landings off
airport with a minimum number of alerts while continuing to provide protection
from terrain and obstacles. Reduced Protection should only be selected when
operating in visual contact with the terrain as alerting times are significantly less
than in normal mode.
Enable or disable RP Mode on the Garmin Terrain-HSVT page. The Page
Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain
Map page.
The MFD Terrain Scale will show a "RP" annunciation when RP Mode is
enabled. The "RP" annunciation will also be shown in the upper right corner of
the PFD.
Foreword
2. Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight “Inhibit Terrain” or “Enable
Terrain” (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-22 MFD and PFD RP Mode Annunciation
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-17
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to enable or disable RP Mode on the Terrain page.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-23 Enable or Disable RP Mode on the Terrain-HSVT Page
2. Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
1. While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press the RP soft key
to enable or disable RP Mode on the Terrain page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
OR
RP Mode Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
RP Mode Soft Key Label
Press To Toggle RP Mode
2. Press the RP soft key to toggle RP Mode on and off.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-24 Enable or Disable RP Mode on the Terrain-HSVT Page
4-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.4.5
Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1. Press the CLR key (returns to the currently viewed page).
OR
1. Press the ENT key (accesses the Terrain-HSVT Page).
Sec 1
System
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD
(Terrain-HSVT page only). The Terrain Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper
left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If
the Terrain-HSVT page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on
the MFD.
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Foreword
Terrain-HSVT alerts employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level
in the normal mode, but only a WARNING alert severity level in RP mode.
When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are
simultaneously issued.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 4-25 Terrain-HSVT Advisory Pop-Up on the MFD
4-19
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Type
GPS signal re-established
Terrain System Test Successful
Terrain System Test in Progress
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
None
None
Aural Message
“Terrain System Available”
“Terrain System test OK”
None
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Terrain Alerting is disabled
None
No GPS position
“Terrain System Not Available”
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
Terrain SVT System Test Fail
“Terrain System Failure”
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Table 4-26 Terrain-HSVT System Test Status Annunciations
Alert Type
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RLC-C, ILI-C)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RLC-W, ILI-W)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
Aural Message
“Caution, Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
“Warning, Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning, Wire, Wire”
“Caution, Obstacle, Obstacle”
“Warning, Obstacle, Obstacle”
Index
Appendix A
Table 4-27 Terrain-HSVT Alerts Summary
4-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.4.6
Mute Caution Alerts
Sec 2
PFD
1. When the MUTE CTN soft key label is present, press the MUTE CTN key (Aural
Caution Alerts will be muted).
OR
1. Press the MENU key, select Mute Caution Alerts, and press ENT.
Sec 1
System
To Mute or Unmute Caution Alerts:
Foreword
Aural Caution Alert, when present, may be suppressed by pressing the MUTE
CTN soft key or selecting Mute Caution Alerts from the Menu.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-28 Mute and Unmute Caution Alerts
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-21
SVT Alerts when Terrain is Inhibited
If the pilot desires to retain the Terrain warning shading on PFD synthetic
terrain even when Terrain HSVT is inhibited then select the Enable SVT Terrain
Alerts When Inhibited menu option.
To Enable or Disable SVT Terrain Alerts When Terrain Is Inhibited:
1. While viewing the Terrain-HSVT page of the MAP page group, press the MENU
key.
2. Highlight Disable SVT Terrain Alerts When Inhibited and press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.4.7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-29 Enable/Disable SVT Terrain Alerts When Inhibited
4-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5
Traffic Systems
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
TAS refers to an active Traffic Advisory System that may be optionally
displayed on the PFD and/or MFD. The TAS is installed separately from the
G500H system. There are variations in performance and control among
the various G500H compatible TAS systems. Refer to the appropriate TAS
documentation for detailed information on the operation of the TAS system.
This section describes the display and control functions available on the G500H
system.
Sec 2
PFD
TAS/TCAS 1 Traffic (Optional)
Sec 1
System
4.5.1
Foreword
The Traffic function requires the installation of a compatible traffic device
and will then provide a separate traffic page in the Map page group as well as the
overlay of traffic on the Map Navigation pages. TIS and TAS cannot be displayed
at the same time. If the rotorcraft has a TAS unit installed, the GDU 620 will be
configured for TAS. If no TAS unit is installed and a GTX Mode-S transponder
is installed then the GDU 620 will be configured for TIS. A pilot can tell which
data is being displayed by the label in the top left corner (TAS/TCAS: OPER
for TAS/TCAS data and TIS: OPER for TIS data). TIS data comes from a GTX
transponder. Coverage is limited to specific areas as shown in the Airmen’s
Information Manual (AIM). TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin
GTS 800 or 820, Skywatch 497, KTA 810, or other unit. Coverage follows
the rotorcraft. In the Navigation Map page setup you can select the maximum
range at which traffic symbols are shown. Once outside of the selected range,
traffic will be decluttered. The Traffic soft key will still be available. The Garmin
GDL 88H can provide TIS-B and ADS-B information. The Garmin GTS ADS-B
products can also provide ADS-B information.
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive.
NOTE: Rotorcraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both
Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Rotorcraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
Appendix A
NOTE: Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-23
Operating Mode
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Range Ring
Traffic Advisory,
200 ft Above and
Descending
Proximity
Advisory, Aircraft
is 500 ft Above
and Descending
Ownship Symbol
Non-Threat
Traffic,
2000 ft Above
and Climbing
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Displaying and Operating Traffic (TAS/TCAS Systems)
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS/TCAS traffic data in relation to
the rotorcraft’s current position and altitude. Traffic page orientation is always
heading up. The traffic mode and altitude filter mode are annunciated in the
upper left corner.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.5.1.1
Non-Threat Traffic,
2000 ft Below and
Climbing
4.5.1.2
Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed.
1. While viewing the Traffic Page of the MAP page group, select the OPERATE soft
key to select Operating Mode.
2. To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY soft key.
NOTE: Not all TAS systems can be controlled from the G500H. The Operate/
Standby soft keys may not be displayed. An alert will be generated when
Standby is selected and the rotorcraft is in the air.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-30 Traffic Map Page - TAS/TCAS
Sec 8
Glossary
Non-Bearing Traffic (System is Unable to Determine Bearing), Aircraft
Distance is 2.0 NM, 1100 ft Above and Descending
4-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5.1.3
Range Ring
4.5.1.4
Foreword
Pressing the RNG keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending on
the installed equipment.
Altitude Display
Sec 1
System
Changing the altitude display mode
1. Press the ALT MODE soft key to change the altitude filter.
Sec 3
MFD
Displayed Traffic Range (ft)
-9,900 to 2,700
-2,700 to 2,700
-2,700 to 9,900
All Traffic Shown (-9,900 to 9,900)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Sec 2
PFD
2. Select the desired altitude filter by pressing the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNRSTD (unrestricted) soft keys. The selection is displayed in the
Altitude mode field.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Traffic Advisories (TAs) are always displayed, regardless of altitude
mode.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 4-31 Displayed Traffic Range
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-25
TAS/TCAS Symbology
Traffic is displayed using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol
Description
Other Traffic
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.5.1.5
Sec 2
PFD
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
The traffic system determines the type of symbol used for each target. Refer
to the traffic system documentation for information regarding the criteria used
to determine target type.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
rotorcraft. Closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria for
the specific traffic system. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display
range is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative
bearing of the intruder.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Table 4-32 TAS/TCAS Traffic Symbol Description
4-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5.1.6
Traffic System Status
Mode
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TAS Standby
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
Sec 3
MFD
TAS Operating
Sec 2
PFD
TAS Self-test Initiated
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Table 4-33 TAS Modes
FAILED
Data is not being received from the TAS unit.
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data).
Data is not being received from the TAS unit.
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is
self-reporting a failure.
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit.
Sec 8
Glossary
DATA FAILED
Description
Sec 7
Symbols
NO TRFC DATA
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
TRFC FAIL
Sec 5
Additional
Features
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the
center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Sec 1
System
The traffic mode is indicated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Foreword
NOTE: Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the
self-test and operating modes.
Appendix A
Table 4-34 TAS Failure Annunciations
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-27
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Sec 1
System
Foreword
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a
banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Sec 2
PFD
TA OFF SCALE*
TA/ X.XNM/± XX ↕**
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending). The system distance units are set
to Metric or Imperial and are shown as such in all other
cases except for the traffic distance annunciation.
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 4-35 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
For TAS traffic, TEST MODE can be initiated from the Page Menu (press the
MENU key) when the traffic device is in Standby mode.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
TA X.X ± XX ↕**
Description
4-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5.1.7
Traffic Pop-Up
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The traffic pop-up will not appear when your rotorcraft is on the
ground.
Foreword
When the GDU 620 MFD is displaying any page (other than the Traffic page)
and a traffic alert becomes active, the Traffic pop-up will be displayed.
1. Press ENT to go directly to the Traffic page.
Sec 2
PFD
OR
2. Press CLR to return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Pop-Up
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-36 Traffic Pop-Up
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-29
Foreword
4.5.2
TIS Traffic (Optional)
Sec 1
System
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory
use only. TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: TIS is available only when the rotorcraft is within the service volume
of a TIS-capable terminal radar site. Rotorcraft without an operating
transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Rotorcraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD.
The type of traffic systems that is installed is determined by the traffic page
display in the upper left corner of the MFD.
If Traffic Information Service (TIS) is configured, TIS will be displayed in the
upper left corner of the MFD.
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and
avoidance of other rotorcraft. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic
data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every five seconds. The GDU 620 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5
NM radius, from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet above the requesting rotorcraft.
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different symbols.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
4.5.2.1
Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in
relation to the rotorcraft’s current position and altitude, without clutter from the
basemap. Rotorcraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there
is no valid heading.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page. When the rotorcraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby
Mode. Once the rotorcraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating
Mode and the GDU 620 begins to display traffic information.
4-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to select the Map Page Group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
Sec 1
System
3. Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Select the OPERATE soft key to begin displaying traffic.
OR
Sec 2
PFD
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Select Operate Mode (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and then press the ENT
key.
Sec 3
MFD
Operating
Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 7
Symbols
Non-Threat Traffic,
Aircraft is 3,000 feet
above, climbing, and
moving in the direction
of the line
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is 1,200 feet
above, climbing,
and moving in the
direction of the line
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-37 Traffic Map Page - TIS
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-31
Foreword
4.5.2.2
TIS Symbology
TIS Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 4-38 TIS Traffic Symbols
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
rotorcraft. Closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A
Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half
TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic
is moving, to the nearest 45º. Traffic information for which TIS is unable to
determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the bottom center of
the Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of other map pages
on which traffic can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting rotorcraft and other intruder
rotorcraft is displayed above/below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the
other rotorcraft is above the requesting rotorcraft, the altitude separation appears
above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude
trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic symbols for rotorcraft
without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or
climb/descent information.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Traffic Advisory (TA)
4-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5.2.3
TIS Limitations
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not
relieve the pilot of responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not
be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no
visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are provided for, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or
TIS advisory.
Foreword
NOTE: This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive. Garmin
recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical
Information Manual, Section 1-3-5.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a “secondary
surveillance” radar similar to the ATCRBS. TIS operation may be intermittent
during turns or other maneuvering. TIS is dependent on two-way, “line-ofsight” communication between the aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the
structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna (usually
located on the underside of the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna,
the signal may be temporarily interrupted. Other limitations and anomalies
associated with TIS are described in the AIM, Section 1-3-5.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, it has some system
limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these
limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the
information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. TIS
will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-33
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the
ground stations is the responsibility of the
FAA. Refer to the Aeronautical Information
Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map
covering the U.S.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S.,
particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of
radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may
not be detected by TIS.
TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which
the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately
five seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a “real time” position,
the TIS ground station uses a “predictive algorithm” in its tracking software.
This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected
positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft
maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display. These
errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector
(it will lag); intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and
may be used to assist in “see and avoid.” Some of the more common examples
of these errors follow:
• When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the
tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft
abruptly changes course within 0.25 NM, TIS may display the intruder on
the opposite side of the client than it actually is.
These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few
radar scans once the course has stabilized.
4-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the
coverage extends from about 3,000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and
obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and
out of range of an adjacent site.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIScapable Mode S radar site.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service.
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following:
Sec 2
PFD
A “Traffic Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service
becomes unavailable or is out of range.
Sec 1
System
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator
on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are
detected in the area.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft,
the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs
increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual
annunciation are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display,
no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the
display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently
increases, another voice alert is generated.
Foreword
4.5.2.4
TIS Alerts
When the number of Traffic Advisories (TAs) on the Traffic Map Page
increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-35
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA*
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
4.5.2.5
TIS System Status
The GDU 620 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If
TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating
Mode in the air. If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
DATA FAILED*
FAILED*
UNAVAILABLE
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder
Data is being received from the transponder, but a
failure is detected in the data stream
The transponder has failed
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 4-39 TIS Failure Annunciations
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
When the rotorcraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode.
If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby Mode is selected,
the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case when TIS has failed).
Once the rotorcraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic
information is displayed. The mode can be changed manually using soft keys or
the page menu.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(Also shown in white in center of
page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Table 4-40 TIS Modes
4-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
OR
2. Select Operate mode or Standby mode whether airborne or on the ground.
Sec 2
PFD
1. Press the MENU key.
Sec 1
System
2. Select the STANDBY or OPERATE soft key to switch between modes. The mode
is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Foreword
Switching Between TIS Operating Modes
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group and then turn the small MFD
knob to the Traffic Map Page.
3. Press the ENT key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Traffic Status
Banner
Annunciation
Description
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
4-37
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range
TA OFF SCALE* Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected
display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory
TA/ X.XNM/± XX↕ Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude separation
**
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed
AGE MM:SS
from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age
increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last
message)
TRFC COAST
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this
message is displayed
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The annunciations indicate the status of traffic information appear in a
banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the
rotorcraft is in the air.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
TRFC RMVD
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60
seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not
displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
4.5.3
ADS-B Traffic (Optional)
ADS-B In allows a properly-equipped aircraft to receive TIS-B and other
aircraft equipped with ADS-B out capability.
OPR/STBY
Motion
Absolute
Relative
Off
Duration
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Table 4-41 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
Deselect
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Back
Back
Figure 4-42 ADS-B Traffic Page Functional Diagram
Depending on the installation the OPR/STBY soft key may appear. When
in Standby mode, pressing the MENU key will show the Page menu where the
traffic LRU can be placed into TEST mode.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
30 Sec
1 Min
2 Min
5 Min
Back
Alt Mode
4-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5.3.1
Target Selection
Traffic targets displayed on the dedicated traffic page may be selected in order
to obtain additional information about a traffic target.
1. Press the small MFD knob to start target selection.
Foreword
2. Turn the small or large MFD knobs to step through selection of the available
targets.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3. After selecting a target, you can press the small MFD knob to leave the target
selected, and return the small MFD to page selection mode.
4. Use the DESELECT softkey to turn off selected traffic.
Sec 3
MFD
ADS-B and
TCAS Status and
Altitude Filter
Map
Orientation
Selected
Traffic Info
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Range Ring
Radius
Ownship Icon
Sec 7
Symbols
Selected Vector
Motion and
Duration
On Scene Mode
Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Range Ring
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Traffic Motion
Vector
Basic Directional
Traffic, 6,000 ft
Below and
Climbing
Sec 8
Glossary
Turn Cursor
Knob for
Next Target
Figure 4-43 ADS-B Traffic Page (Absolute Motion)
from the ownship are depicted as proximate targets.
Appendix A
NOTE: Traffic targets within 1,200 ft vertical separation and 6NM
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-39
Foreword
Symbol
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Sec 1
System
Basic Directional Traffic
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Proximate Directional Traffic
Sec 3
MFD
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Directional Alerted Traffic
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Directional Surface Vehicle
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-44 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne/
on-ground status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the
surface vehicles).
4-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.5.3.2
Status
Heading is not valid
GPS track is valid
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Ground speed is greater than 15 knots
ADS-B is active
Index
4-41
Appendix A
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Absolute motion vectors match the color of the intruder (white
or yellow). Relative motion vectors are green except for Traffic Advisories
whose Relative Motion vectors are yellow. The annunciation on the bottom
of the dedicated traffic page indicates which vector type is selected and
their length.
Sec 7
Symbols
4.5.3.3
Motion Vector
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the
traffic targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground. When
Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic targets
display how the traffic target is moving relative to your rotorcraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic targets track and ground speed and your rotorcraft’s
track and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic
target is moving with respect to your rotorcraft and indicates where the traffic target
will be, relative to your rotorcraft, at the time specified by the length of the vector.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
When the heading and track are invalid, “LATCHED” displays and the system
obtains the last know orientation (heading, track, or true north).
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The display reverts to track up (“TRK UP”) if all of these conditions are
met:
Sec 3
MFD
When the heading is valid or ADS is OFF, and with only the TAS/TCAS
operating, the ADS-B traffic map orientates to heading up (“HDG UP”).
Sec 2
PFD
If a TCAS system is integrated with the ADS-B system then this shows the
current status of the TCAS system. When the ADS-B system is integrated with
a TCAS system, the controls are provided on the installed navigator and the
OPR/STBY soft key is not available.
Sec 1
System
TCAS Status
Foreword
ADS-B Status
ADS-B Status displays the current status of traffic application: Off, Surface,
Airborne, N/A, Fail, or Test.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-45 Absolute Motion (White Vectors)
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Relative Motion vectors are unavailable when the rotorcraft is on
the ground. The duration will be annunciated as UNAVAIL after “RELATIVE
MOTION -” at the bottom of the screen.
4-42
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Vector Duration
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the
calculated distance and direction of the traffic target. A longer duration will
result in a longer vector. Press the smart key for the desired duration.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-46 Relative Motion (Green Vectors)
Altitude Filter
Appendix A
Displayed Traffic Range (ft)
-9,900 to 2,700
-2,700 to 2,700
-2,700 to 9,900
All Traffic Shown (-9,900 to 9,900)
Index
Table 4-47 Displayed Traffic Range
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Sec 7
Symbols
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or
Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the “Displayed Traffic Range” table. The
filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Press the Alt Mode smart key to
display the altitude smart keys. Press the smart key to select the altitude filter
value.
4-43
XM WX Satellite Weather (Optional)
The primary map for viewing XM WX Satellite Weather data are the Weather
Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group. These are the only GDU 620 map
displays capable of all available XM WX Satellite weather products. The XM WX
Satellite Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up.
4.6.1
Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate column).
If a weather product is not received within the 30, 60, 90, or 120 minute
Expiration Time intervals, the data is considered expired and is removed from
the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is
currently being broadcast by XM WX Satellite Radio services. If more than half
of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of
the product age displayed changes to yellow.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6
4-44
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.2
Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually. The Wx
Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu.
The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the
Weather Legends. The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the
viewing ranges of the weather products.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the Large or Small MFD knob to select Weather Setup (1/2) or Weather
Setup (2/2) and press ENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-48 Weather Page Menu Options
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-49 Weather Setup Group Selection
Appendix A
5. Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD
knob to cancel and return to the XM Weather Data Link Map Page.
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Press ENT to save a selection.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed, turn the Large MFD knob to
highlight the desired item and then turn the small MFD knob to select the
desired weather feature value. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected,
weather data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-45
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WX Page Menu - Weather Setup
Menu Item
Adjustment
Map Orientation
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
NEXRAD Legend
Source
Echo Top Data Viewing Range
Cloud Top Data Viewing Range
Lightning Data Viewing Range
Cell Mov Data Viewing Range
SIG/AIR Viewing Range
PIREPS Data Viewing Range
METAR Data Viewing Range
Surface Data Viewing Range
Frz Lvl Data Viewing Range
Wnds Aloft Data Viewing Range
County Data Viewing Range
TFR Data Viewing Range
AIREPS Data Viewing rnage
Icing Data Viewing Range
Turbulence Data Viewing Range
North Up, Track Up
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
On/Off
US, Canada
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Cyclone Data Viewing Range
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 4-50 XM Weather Page Menu Setup Options
4-46
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.3
XM Weather Symbols and Product Age
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 2
PFD
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Sec 1
System
The product label in the legend will turn yellow at half the expiration time
and gray when expired. Expired products will not be shown on the display.
Foreword
The weather product symbols, the expiration time and the broadcast rate are
shown in the following table. The broadcast rate represents the interval at which XM
WX Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content
is received by the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are
defined and controlled by XM WX Satellite Radio and its data vendors.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-47
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
NEXRAD (NEXRAD and Echo Top are Mutually Exclusive)
Echo Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
(NEXRAD and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
Cloud Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
XM Lightning
Cell Movement
SIGMETs / AIRMETs
METARs
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Freezing Levels
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
PIREPS
TFRs
AIREPS
Icing
Turbulence
Cyclone Warnings
30
30
60
30
30
60
90
90
60
120
90
60
90
60
90
90
180
60
Table 4-51 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
NOTE: Product age for individual reports of XM AIRMETs, SIGMETs, City
Forecasts, County Warnings, Cell Movement and TFRs are not provided
by XM Weather Service.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Weather Product
Appendix A
Product age indication for XM Icing Potential and Turbulence is not
included on the weather map. The valid time for these products is
displayed on the weather map in place of the generation time.
Index
The valid time indication for XM Freezing Level, Winds Aloft and Canada
Winds Aloft is not displayed. Instead, the generation time for these is
displayed.
4-48
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Symbol
Description
Foreword
Flood
Severe Thunderstorm
Sec 1
System
Tornado
Sunny
Sec 2
PFD
Part Sun
Sec 3
MFD
Cloudy
Rainy
T-Storm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Snow
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Windy
Foggy
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Haze
High/Low Temp
4.6.4
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-52 Weather Symbols
XM Weather Legends
Appendix A
1. A full page legend can be selected by selecting the Weather Legend option in
the XM Weather Map Menu or pressing the LEGEND soft key on the Weather
Map Page. The legend displayed will match the selected weather products. Turn
the large or small MFD knobs to scroll through the legend, if necessary.
Sec 8
Glossary
The LEGEND soft key displays a pop-up legend of the currently used
weather products. Pressing the LEGEND soft key again, the MFD knob, the
ENT, or CLR keys will remove the legend.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-49
4-50
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-53 Weather Legends
XM NEXRAD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection,
processing, and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may
not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative
age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never
use NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Instead,
use it in an early-warning capacity of pre-departure and en route evaluation.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 highresolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather
Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information
for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM. The NEXRAD network provides
important information about severe weather for air traffic safety.
Sec 3
MFD
4.6.5
Sec 2
PFD
2. An abbreviated legend may be displayed on the upper right side of a WX Data
Link Map page for the applicable weather products when selected in the Page
Menu options for Weather.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-51
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is
shown. This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual
radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the
Weather Data Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the LEGEND soft key
when NEXRAD is selected for display.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-54 XM Weather - NEXRAD
Figure 4-55 NEXRAD Weather Legend
4-52
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.6.5.2
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
Sec 3
MFD
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative
to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy
reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z
increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Sec 2
PFD
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply
put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a
radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For
instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
Sec 1
System
4.6.5.1
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver.
Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected
reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex.
Foreword
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or
ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops
information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in
grayish-purple.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• NEXRAD composite reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna
elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude
storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 NM, each square block on the display
represents an area of four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected
by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled
within the area.
Sec 8
Glossary
• NEXRAD composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information
to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics. For example, it
is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
Index
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-53
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
Foreword
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
Sec 1
System
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar
scans
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: At present, NEXRAD data can age significantly by the time the
mosaic image is created. Although such situations are not believed to be
typical, in extreme latency and mosaic-creation scenarios, the actual age
of the oldest NEXRAD data in the mosaic can exceed the age indication
in the cockpit by 15-20 minutes. Even small time differences between
the age indicator and actual conditions can be important for safety of
flight, especially when considering fast-moving weather hazards, quickly
developing weather scenarios, and/or fast-moving aircraft.
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1. While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press the
MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 1/2” and press ENT.
3. With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Figure 4-56 Weather Page Map Orientation
4. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
5. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
XM Weather Page Map Orientation
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.6.6
4-54
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.7
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 3
MFD
4. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 2
PFD
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight he NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value.
Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
Sec 1
System
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 1/2” and press ENT.
Foreword
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
NEXRAD weather data will not be shown. For the value (such as 100 NM) that
is selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at the selected map ranges (such as 100
NM) and lower.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-55
NEXRAD Legend
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Figure 4-57 NEXRAD Legend Selection
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the NEXRAD Legend value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.8
4-56
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.9
NEXRAD Source
Foreword
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of using US or Canadian
Nexrad data.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-58 NEXRAD Source Selection
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight US or Canada. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the NEXRAD Legend value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-57
XM Echo Tops
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops is
mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Echo Tops data shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or
clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected.
Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Figure 4-59 XM Weather - Echo Tops
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or
ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops
information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in
grayish-purple.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.10
4-58
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Echo Top Data Viewing Range
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page, or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Echo Top Data Viewing Range value.
Foreword
The Echo Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Echo Top weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Echo
Tops will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is selected, Echo Top
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-59
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Cloud Tops is
mutually exclusive with Echo Tops and NEXRAD.
Cloud Tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
Figure 4-60 XM Weather - Cloud Tops
To display the Cloud Tops legend, select the LEGEND soft key when Cloud
Tops is selected for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color
scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather products is mutually
exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops or NEXRAD data is not
shown.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
XM Cloud Tops
Sec 1
System
4.6.11
4-60
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Cloud Top Data Viewing Range
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cloud Top Data Viewing Range value.
Foreword
The Cloud Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Cloud Top weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Cloud Tops will not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected,
Cloud Top data will be shown at map ranges of that value (150 NM) and lower.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-61
XM WX Satellite Lightning
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer
region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Figure 4-61 XM Weather - Lightning
Lightning Data Viewing Range
The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD
Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Lightning will not be shown.
Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at
map ranges of the selected value (100 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Lightning Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.12
4-62
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.13
XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Foreword
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-62 XM Weather - AIRMETs (Graphic)
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
Appendix A
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
Index
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-63
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is
selected, SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected
value (100 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the SIG/AIR Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Viewing Textual Sigmet/Airmets
Textual Sigmet/Airmets can be viewed by selecting the Sigmet/Airmet outline
on the Weather (WX) page.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a Sigmet/Airmet line. Press ENT.
2. The Sigmet/Airmet information will be shown. Press the small MFD knob to
return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-63 XM Weather - AIRMETs (Text)
4-64
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.14
XM PIREPs
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-64 XM Weather - PIREPs
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the PIREPs value.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-65
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
XM METARs
Sec 1
System
4.6.15
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-65 XM Weather - Graphic METARs
METAR Viewing Range
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and lower.
4-66
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Foreword
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the METAR Data Viewing Range value.
Viewing Textual METARs
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 2
PFD
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available
information.
Appendix A
Figure 4-66 XM Weather - Textual METARs
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the previously viewed page.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-67
XM Winds Aloft
The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude where at and
below that value Winds Aloft weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). Altitude can be selected in 3000 foot
increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. “ALT UNAVBL” is displayed
when the altitude is unsupported for a specific product and will never show data
on the map.
Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft keys steps down or up in the
3,000 foot increments. In the figure below where 6,000 feet is selected, Winds
Aloft data will be shown at 6,000 feet.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.16
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-67 XM Weather - Winds Aloft
Index
Figure 4-68 XM Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
4-68
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected,
Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-69
XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within
the installed Aviation Database service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and
forecast weather conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36,
and 48 hours by pressing the SRFC TIME soft key or in the Page Menu Weather
Setup options.
When enabled, the Surface Analysis forecast shows frontal lines indicating weather fronts and the direction they are moving. High and Low pressure
centers are noted with a large H or L. The Forecast Time menu item will step
through the intervals manually.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.17
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-69 XM Weather - Surface Analysis and City Forecast
A Cold Front is a front where cold air replaces warm air. A blue line with
blue triangles that point in the direction of the cold air flow.
Figure 4-70 XM Weather - Cold Front
A Warm Front is where warm air replaces cold air. An orange line with
orange half moons that point in the direction of the warm air flow.
Figure 4-71 XM Weather - Warm Front
4-70
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-72 XM Weather - Stationary Front
Foreword
A Stationary Front is a front with very little horizontal movement. The line
alternates with orange and blue sections which point in opposite directions to
symbolize little movement.
An Occluded Front is where a cold front has overtaken and merged with a
warm front. The line alternates with the blue triangle and orange half moon symbols on the same side of the line pointing in the direction the front is moving.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-73 XM Weather - Occluded Front
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
The Forecast Time option allows you to select the forecast time when the
Surface and City Forecast weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx
Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). Forecasts are available for intervals of current,
12, 24, 36, and 48 hours. The interval is selected by pressing the FCST TIME
soft key on the Wx Data Link Map page.
Sec 7
Symbols
Forecast Time
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Surface Data Viewing Range
The Surface Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Surface Data weather products will be shown on
the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Surface Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected,
Surface data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and
lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Surface Data Viewing Range value.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-71
XM County Warnings
County data provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include
information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, flood conditions, and
other natural disasters.
Figure 4-74 XM Weather - County Warnings
County Data Viewing Range
The County Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value County weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map pages (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, County
Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, County
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the County Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.18
4-72
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.19
XM TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TFR Detail
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select TFR Symbol
To View Details
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-73
Index
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
Sec 7
Symbols
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the GFDS Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-75 XM Weather - TFRs
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual TFRs
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1. While viewing a XM Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol (yellow circle). Press ENT.
2. The TFR details will be shown.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-76 XM Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
4-74
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.20
XM Cell Movement
Foreword
Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by a ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares,
with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-77 XM Weather - Cell Movement
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along
with NEXRAD. On the Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be
selected independently.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-75
The Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range and below where Cell Movement weather products will appear on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Cell
Movement will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, Cell
Movement data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Cell Movement Data Viewing Range
4-76
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.21
XM AIREPs
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the AIREPs Viewing Range option.
Foreword
Air Reports (AIREPs) are messages from an aircraft, typically from commercia
aircraft, to a ground station. AIREPs are similar to PIREPs.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-78 XM Weather - AIREPs
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-77
2. Press ENT to view text information. Press ENT again to return to the previous page.
Foreword
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting a AIREP on the Map or
Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a AIREP.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-79 XM Weather - AIREP Text Detail
4-78
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.22
XM Cyclone
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cyclone Data Viewing Range option.
Foreword
The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path
with the date and time.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Projected Path With Date
And Time
Current Position Of Cyclone
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-80 XM Weather - Cyclone
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-79
XM Freezing Level
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the Freezing Level is found. When no data is displayed for a
given altitude, the data for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date
and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next update.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.23
Figure 4-81 XM Weather - Freezing Levels
Freezing Level Viewing Range
The Freezing Level Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Freezing Level weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Freezing Level Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is
selected, Freezing Level data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value
(100 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Frz Lvl Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-80
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.6.24
XM Icing
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
The Icing product shows a graphic view of the current icing environment
in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The Icing product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current
conditions at the time of the analysis. Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing
conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large, super cooled
water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat
areas are depicted as black and red blocks over the Icing colors. Icing and SLD
data are shown between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Icing Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-81
Index
4. Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude
is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Appendix A
Figure 4-82 XM Weather - Icing and SLD
XM Turbulence
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe
or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is
intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Turbulence Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4. Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude
is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.25
4-82
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7
Garmin Connext Satellite Services (Optional)
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
More detail on GFDS weather products and coverage can be found at:
Sec 1
System
Garmin Connext Satellite Services (GCSS) is an optional feature available
with the Iridium satellite system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin
GSR 56. The primary maps for viewing Connext weather data are the Weather
Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group. These are the only GDU 620 map
displays capable of all available GFDS weather products. The WX Weather pages
may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up. Both Connext and SiriusXM
Weather may be installed and selected individually. Connext Weather coverage
is available throughout most of Europe, Canada and the U.S. Additional radar
coverage areas are being added continuously. Selection of the Weather Source
is made on the Aux - System Setup page.
Foreword
NOTE: Garmin Connext Satellite Services was formerly called GFDS and
may still display as GFDS on GDUs.
https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: A system can be configured for both SiriusXM and Connext Weather,
but both cannot be displayed a the same time.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-83
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.1
Connext Weather Registration
4.7.1.1
Registering Connext Weather
It is necessary to register the GDU to utilize the weather products.
1. Visit flyGarmin.com to create a Connext Weather account. Provide the GDU
System ID and airframe info (model, tail number, etc).
2. An access code to enter on the GFDS Registration page.
3. While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU key to
display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
4. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Register With GFDS." Press ENT.
5. Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to
the next position. Highlight REGISTER and press ENT to complete the process.
The GDU will contact the Connext servers using the GSR 56 transceiver. If the
access code and system ID are correct, it will download and display the airframe
info.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-83 Select GFDS Registration
4-84
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-84 Registration Page (Default and Completed)
3. With the Access Code field highlighted, press CLR to remove the access code.
Sec 7
Symbols
4. Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no longer be linked to the
account.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Register With GFDS.” Press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU key to
display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.7.1.2
Deactivating Unit Registration
Registration of the GDU unit can be deactivated so that the unit can no longer
make requests to GFDS. This does not cancel the subscription.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-85
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the 30, 60, 90,
or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals, the data is considered expired and is
removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with
what is currently being broadcast by Garmin Connext Weather services. If more
than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received,
the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
4.7.3
Customizing the Weather Map
Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually. The Wx Map
pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu. The Page Menu
options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the Weather Legends.
The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the viewing ranges of
the weather products.
NOTE: If multiple weather sources are installed, then the weather
source must first be selected on the AUX System Setup page. Refer to
Section 3.2.1.10.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the “Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
selectable intervals.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.2
Index
Figure 4-85 Weather Page Menu Options
4-86
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
2. With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed, turn the Large MFD knob to select
the desired item.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-86 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Options
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature option.
5. Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD
knob to cancel and return to the Connext Weather Map Page.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4. Press ENT to save a selection.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-87
WX Page Menu - Weather Setup
Foreword
Menu Item
North Up, Track Up
Off, 50 NM to 500 NM
On/Off
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Table 4-87 GFDS Weather Page Menu Setup Options
4.7.4
GFDS Data Request
It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products. Requests can
be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "GFDS Data Request." Press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Map Orientation
PRECIP Data Viewing Range
PRECIP Legend
IR SAT Data Viewing Range
Lightning Data Viewing Range
SIG/Air Viewing Range
PIREPS Viewing Range
METAR Data Viewing Range
Wnd Aloft Data Viewing Range
TFR Data Viewing Range
Adjustment
Figure 4-88 Select GFDS Data Request
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to
the next position.
4-88
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-89 GFDS Data Request Page
GFDS Data Request Coverage
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Present Position GFDS Data Request
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.7.4.1
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "GFDS Data Request." Press ENT.
5. To deselect Present Position reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
"Present Position." Press ENT.
Appendix A
Destination GFDS Data Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Destination." Press ENT.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-89
Index
2. The Destination box will be checked and weather information will be requested
around your flight plan destination.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 8
Glossary
4. The Present Position box will be checked and weather information will be
requested around your present position.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Present Position." Press ENT.
Foreword
Flight Plan GFDS Data Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Flight Plan." Press ENT.
2. The range list will now be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight
the desired range and press ENT.
Figure 4-90 Flight Plan GFDS Data Request
3. The Flight Plan box will be checked and weather information will be requested
along your flight plan forward of your present position for the range selected.
4. To deselect Flight Plan reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Flight
Plan." Press ENT.
Waypoint GFDS Data Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Waypoint." Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Selection field will now be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob
to select the first character. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next
character. When finished selecting the waypoint name, press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3. To deselect Destination reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
"Destination." Press ENT.
4-90
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-91 Waypoint GFDS Data Request
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3. The Waypoint box will be checked and weather information will be requested
around the selected waypoint for the range selected (next operation).
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-91
Figure 4-92 Waypoint GFDS Data Request Range
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Diameter/Route Width and then
press ENT.
4.7.4.2
GFDS Data Request Auto Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Auto Request - Update Rate."
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select "Off" or an Update Rate. When finished
selecting the Update Rate, press ENT. The Update Rate will default to "OFF"
at each power cycle.
Foreword
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Diameter/Route Width GFDS Data Request
1. After selecting a coverage option in the previous section, the Diameter/Route
Width field will now be highlighted.
Index
Figure 4-93 GFDS Data Request Auto Update Rate
4-92
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7.4.3
GFDS Data Request Manual Request
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The GFDS weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic
update timing by selecting a Manual Request. When multiple requests are made,
some products are merged with the old data (SIGMETs/AIRMETs, TAFs, TFRs,
and METARs), but the old data of other products is discarded.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight "Manual Request - Send Req."
2. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
3. The update request will occur immediately. The action will be noted in the
4.7.4.4
GFDS Data Request Status Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Request Status window will show a response such as "OK" when manual
requests are made. The time for the next auto update will be shown.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Request Status window. The Auto Request time will be reset to the selected
value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-94 Manual GFDS Data Request
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-93
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1. While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press the
MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
2. With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Weather Page Map Orientation
Sec 1
System
4.7.5
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-95 Weather Page Map Orientation
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4-94
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7.6
Precipitation Data Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Precipitation (PRECIP) Viewing Range option allows you to select the
map range where at and below the selected value PRECIP weather products will
be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off
is selected, PRECIP weather data will not be shown. In the figure below where
500 NM is selected, PRECIP data will be shown at map ranges of 500 NM and
lower. TFRs and METARs are the only weather products shown below 10 NM.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Area Of No Coverage
Coverage Boundary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-96 GFDS PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-95
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Data Viewing Range. Turn the
small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
PRECIP Legend
The PRECIP Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated
version of the PRECIP legend in the top right region of the MFD. The full legend
is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Figure 4-97 GFDS PRECIP Legend Selection
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Legend.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.7
4-96
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7.8
GFDS Infrared Satellite Data Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) data is available over North America and Europe
and depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter cloud top
colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes. Information is
updated every half hour.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-98 GFDS Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend
4-97
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
IR SAT Data Viewing Range
The IR SAT Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value IR SAT weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD GFDS Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, IR SAT
will not be shown. For the selected value (such as 250 NM) is selected, IR SAT
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight IR SAT Data Viewing Range. Turn the
small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
Data Link Lightning Data Viewing Range
Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) data shows the approximate location of
cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has
occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning
strike is not displayed. Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and
extreme southern Canada (cloud to cloud strikes are not reported).
Figure 4-99 GFDS Data Link Lightning and Legend
The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD
GFDS Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Lightning will not be shown.
Where a value (such as 250 NM) is selected, GFDS data will be shown at map
ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
Appendix A
1. While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight DL LTNG Data Viewing Range.
Index
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.9
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4-98
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7.10
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Foreword
Sec 1
System
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Cursor Location
Sec 2
PFD
Product Age
Sec 3
MFD
IFR Line
SIGMET Line
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Cursor On AIRMET/SIGMET Line
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Icing
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 8
Glossary
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes in the U.S. Elsewhere, updates are made as they are issued.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-100 GFDS Weather Page - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
Viewing Textual SIGMETs/AIRMETs
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-99
Index
2. The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown. Press the WX
soft key to view weather information.
Appendix A
Textual SIGMET/AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET/AIRMET
line on the Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET/AIRMET line. Press ENT.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-101 GFDS Weather - AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is
selected, SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected
value (250 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight SIG/AIR Viewing Range.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-100
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7.11
AIREP/PIREP
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Product Age
Cursor Location
Foreword
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Sec 3
MFD
Selected PIREP
PIREP Detail
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-102 FGFDS Weather Page - AIREPs/PIREPs
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-101
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value.
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP/PIREP on the
Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with an AIREP/PIREP. Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-103 GFDS Weather - AIREPs/PIREPs Detail and Legend
4-102
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.7.12
METARs
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are generally updated hourly, but some site are more frequent. Special
updates are done as conditions warrant. METARs typically contain information
about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud
heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information
on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
Foreword
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Cursor Location
Product Age
Sec 7
Symbols
VFR METAR
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected METAR (MVFR)
Appendix A
IFR METAR
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 4-104 GFDS Weather - Graphic METARs and Legend
4-103
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual METARs
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-105 GFDS Weather - METARs Detail and Legend
4-104
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
METAR Viewing Range
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Foreword
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and lower.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight METAR Data Viewing Range.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 3
MFD
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-105
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.13
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft
keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments.
Product Age
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Selected Altitude
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Present Position
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Winds Aloft Symbol
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Winds Aloft Altitude Soft Keys
Figure 4-106 GFDS Weather - Winds Aloft
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-107 GFDS Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
4-106
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 3
MFD
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Foreword
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. When 150 NM is selected, Winds Aloft data will
be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-107
GFDS TFRs
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.14
TFR Detail
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select TFR Symbol
To View Details
Figure 4-108 GFDS Weather - TFRs
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the GFDS Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
1. While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group, turn the large
MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the GFDS Weather Map page.
4-108
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Viewing Textual TFRs
Sec 1
System
2. The TFR details will be shown.
Foreword
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1. While viewing a GFDS Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol (yellow circle). Press ENT.
3. Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-109 GFDS Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
4.8
FIS-B Weather (Optional)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NOTE: The ADS-B/FIS-B receiver will send all FIS-B weather and NOTAM/
TFR information that it receives. There may be more information available
than is received by the ADS-B/FIS-B receiver. This can lead to the
ADS-B/FIS-B receiver, and subsequently the GDU620, displaying the status
of the FIS-B data as “received” and “current” even though some of the
data for the region is missing.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is
a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological
events such as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes. An extensive network
of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental
United States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is
124 nautical miles. The ADS-B/FIS-B receiver sends the FIS-B information and
sends it to the GDU 620.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-109
Sec 7
Symbols
4.8.2
NEXRAD Limitations
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but
not all, are listed for the user’s awareness:
• The Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 1.5 minutes (1.5 nautical miles
= 2.78 km) wide by 1 minute (1 nautical miles = 1.852 km) tall. The
CONUS NEXRAD “pixels” are 7.5 minutes (7.5 nautical miles = 13.89
km) wide by 5 minutes (5 nautical miles = 9.26 km) wide. Above 60°
of latitude the Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 3 minutes/nautical miles.
CONUS NEXRAD is not available above 60° of latitude. The intensity
level reflected by the pixel will be the highest level sampled within the
area covered by each pixel.
NOTE: Where it is noted that NOTAM data is available, it is possible only
a subset of the data is available and that more NOTAM reports may arrive
in future updates. Updates occur approximately every ten minutes.
4.8.3
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” is the amount of transmitted power
returned to the radar receiver. Reflectivity (designated by the letter Z) covers a
wide range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a more convenient
number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ),
is used. The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the
radar increases.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
NEXRAD Abnormalities
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some,
but not all, causes of abnormal displayed information include:
• Ground Clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar scans
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off-line
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.1
4-110
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.8.4
NEXRAD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Affected Areas
Any area in the continental United States (CONUS) or Alaska where the
distance from ADS-B ground stations, or the combined effect of distance and
low altitude, is sufficiently great may cause poor reception. A good source of
information for ground station coverage can be found at:
Sec 1
System
The NEXRAD option has selections of Regional, CONUS, or Combined
NEXRAD. CONUS NEXRAD includes a composite of available NEXRAD radar
imagery across the 48 states. Regional NEXRAD is a composite of available
NEXRAD radar imagery in a local area, showing a more detailed image
than CONUS NEXRAD. FIS-B weather data reception requires line-of-site
communication between the receiver and the ADS-B ground station. Incomplete
Regional and/or CONUS NEXRAD imagery displayed on the MAP and FIS-B
Weather Pages of the affected products is an indicator of poor FIS-B reception.
Foreword
When enabled, NEXRAD weather information is shown. Composite data
from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is
composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather level severity.
Refer to the legend for a description of the color code.
http://www.faa.gov/
Sec 8
Glossary
NEXRAD Weather Setup
Sec 7
Symbols
4.8.5
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the
NextGen ADS-B ground station infrastructure. However, due to line-of-sight
broadcast characteristics, operators with properly installed and functioning
equipment may still receive incomplete FIS-B data when signal reception is
limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude.
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, press the Menu key.
2. With the Weather Setup selection highlighted, press ENT.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-111
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press
the MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
2. With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Weather Page Map Orientation
Sec 1
System
4.8.5.1
Figure 4-110 Weather Page Map Orientation
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4.8.5.2
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
NEXRAD weather data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is
selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of that value (250 NM)
and lower.
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2. The NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value will be highlighted. Turn the small
MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4-112
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.8.5.3
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-111 FIS-B NEXRAD Precipitation and Legend
NEXRAD Legend
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend value.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-113
Foreword
4.8.5.4
NEXRAD Source
Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS-B Weather Menu
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, press the Menu key.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Viewing Range Source
option.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Source option and press ENT.
Continental US NEXRAD (CONUS)
The Display CONUS NEXRAD selection shows NEXRAD radar information
for the entire continental United States. CONUS NEXRAD data is updated every
15 minutes.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
2. With the Weather Setup selection highlighted, press ENT.
Index
Figure 4-112 FIS-B CONUS NEXRAD
4-114
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Regional NEXRAD
Foreword
The Regional NEXRAD selection shows available regional NEXRAD radar
information from reporting ground stations within 500 NM of the rotorcraft
location.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-113 FIS-B Regional NEXRAD
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-115
Regional NEXRAD data and CONUS NEXRAD data are shown together. The
two types of NEXRAD are separated by a white stippled border. This boundary
is updated whenever new Regional or CONUS NEXRAD data is received. The
radius of the boundary is fixed at 150 NM.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Combined NEXRAD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
CONUS Data Area
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Regional Boundary
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-114 FIS-B Combined NEXRAD
4.8.5.5
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
4-116
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Cursor Location
Foreword
Turbulence Line
Product Age
Sec 1
System
Cursor On AIRMET/SIGMET Line
Surface Winds Line
Sec 2
PFD
IFR and Mountain Obscured Line
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-115 FIS-B - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
SIGMET/AIRMET (SIG/AIR) Viewing Range
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-117
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
value.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the
map range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be
shown on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off
is selected, SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. For a value selected (such as,
150 NM), SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of that value
(150 NM), and lower.
Textual SIGMET/AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET/AIRMET
line on the Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET/AIRMET line. Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown. Press the WX
soft key to view weather information.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual SIGMETs/AIRMETs
Figure 4-116 FIS-B AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
• Icing
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
4-118
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.8.5.6
AIREP/PIREP
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Foreword
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Product Age
Cursor Location
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Selected PIREP
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
PIREP Detail
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-117 FIS-B AIREPs/PIREPs
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-119
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP/PIREP on the
Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a AIREP/PIREP. Press ENT.
2. Press ENT or the the small MFD knob to return to the Weather page.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-118 FIS-B AIREPs/PIREPs Detail and Legend
4-120
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.8.5.7
METARs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Foreword
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
Sec 1
System
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Cursor Location
Sec 2
PFD
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Selected METAR (VFR)
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-119 FIS-B Weather - Graphic METARs
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-121
Index
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. For a value (such as 150 NM) selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of that value (150 NM), and lower.
Appendix A
METAR Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the METAR Data Viewing Range value.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Viewing Textual METARs
Index
Figure 4-120 FIS-B Weather - Textual METARs
4-122
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
4.8.5.8
Winds Aloft
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL by pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up
soft keys.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-121 FIS-B Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
Sec 7
Symbols
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. For the value (such as 150 NM) selected, Winds
Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of that value (such as 150 NM), and
lower.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-123
FIS-B TFRs
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.5.9
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Select TFR Outline
To View Details
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
TFR Detail
Figure 4-122 FIS-B Weather - TFRs
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the FIS-B Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, turn the large
MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the FIS-B Weather Map page.
4-124
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Viewing Textual TFRs
Sec 3
MFD
4. Press ENT to return to the Weather page.
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the VIEW TEXT soft key to view the full TFR text.
Sec 1
System
2. A summary of the TFR will be shown and the first TFR will be highlighted. In
the case of multiple TFRs, turn the small or large MFD knobs to highlight the
desired TFR.
Foreword
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1. While viewing a Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to move
the cursor to highlight a TFR outline (yellow circle). Press ENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-123 FIS-B Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-125
Stormscope
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 Stormscope.
The WX-500 Stormscope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the rotorcraft. Stormscope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports
the information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the
WX-500 Stormscope System.
For lightning display interpretation, study the examples in the WX-500
Pilot’s Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or strike patterns shown
on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms that may be near your
rotorcraft.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9
Index
Figure 4-124 Stormscope
4-126
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Symbol
Time Since Strike (Seconds)
Foreword
Less than 6
Less than 60
Sec 1
System
Less than 120
Less than 180
Sec 2
PFD
Table 4-125 Stormscope Symbols
Mode
The Mode selection allows you to select the display of storm cells or strikes.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
View
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: Cell mode uses a clustering program to identify clusters of electrical
activity that indicate cells. Cell mode is most useful during periods of heavy
storm activity. Displaying cell data during these periods frees the user
from sifting through a screen full of discharge points and helps to better
determine where the storm cells are located.
The Mode selection allows you to select 360° or Arc views.
Clearing the Stormscope Page
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Lightning strikes will be cleared from the display and the Rate value will be
reset.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NOTE: When heading is not available (N/A), the pilot must clear the strikes
after each turn.
Sec 7
Symbols
Routinely clearing the Stormscope Page of all discharge points is a good
way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. In a building storm
discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers. In a dissipating storm
discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers.
1. While viewing the Weather Stormscope page, press the Clear key to clear
lightning strikes.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
4-127
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
4-128
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5
ADDITIONAL FEATURES (OPTIONAL)
Sec 2
PFD
Additional features of the GDU 620 include the following:
Sec 1
System
NOTE: ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a
Garmin dealer.
Foreword
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the RFMS for more information.
• ChartView and FliteCharts electronic charts
• SafeTaxi diagrams
Sec 3
MFD
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• XM WX Satellite Weather (covered in section 4.7)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic (covered in sections 4.5 and 4.6)
• Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-1
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Appendix A
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS or TIS traffic data in relation to
the aircraft’s current position and altitude. The Traffic option is designed to assist
in detection and avoidance of other aircraft.
Sec 8
Glossary
XM WX Satellite Weather is an optional service that provides the ability to
display graphic weather data overlaid on the MFD Nav Map and Weather Data
Link pages.
Sec 7
Symbols
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the
GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music, news,
and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and
longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information
at more than 700 airports in the United States. By decreasing the range on an
airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the airport layout
can be seen.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal
procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to
essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the
system.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
5.1
FliteCharts and ChartView
When the Chart feature is available, charts will be shown on the third page
of the Flight Plan page group. The Chart page will default to the nearest airport
if no flight plan or destination airport is present. While you are on the ground,
the displayed charts will default to the current airport location regardless of
flight plan.
Both ChartView and FliteCharts may be geo-referenced. The icon will have
an “x” through it the selected chart does not support geo-referencing.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
The optional Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual
enhancement to the G500H. SVT is displayed as a forward-looking display of
the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. SVT information is shown
on the primary flight display (PFD).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the RFMS for more information.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper
chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and
Procedures are separate from charts, and do provide vertical and lateral
course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight Plan
page. The term “Chart Unavailable” means that the chart cannot be viewed
on the Chart page due to either a chart not being published, or an error
in the chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of
the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The
absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does
not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan. The absence of
a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach under the Flight Plan does not
preclude the ability to view the chart.
Index
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the
requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport
moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by
the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot
situational awareness during ground operations.
5-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the Flight Plan (FPL) page group.
5.1.1
Sec 1
System
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the Chart page.
Foreword
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
ChartView (Optional)
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Appendix A
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
Index
• Airport Diagrams
• Chart NOTAMs
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 8
Glossary
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc.
ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer.
Available data includes:
Sec 7
Symbols
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution. The MFD
depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of
approach charts and on airport diagrams.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-1 ChartView Chart Page
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-3
The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available
for viewing upon reaching the disable date. When turning on the GDU 620, the
Power-up Page indicates any of nine different possible criteria for ChartView
availability. See Table 5-5 for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and
the definition of each.
5.1.2
FliteCharts
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Cycle Number and Revision
Figure 5-2 FliteCharts Chart Page
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of FAA-published terminal procedures
charts. FliteCharts data may also be provided by sources other than the FAA. The
charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. The
MFD FliteCharts depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available from
Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams (not geo-referenced)
5-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select the DBASE soft key for scrolling through the database information.
Scroll through the database with the MFD knob or ENT key.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to select AUX.
2. Press the DB ACTV key to view the databases.
3. Press the small MFD knob and then turn the small or large MFD knobs to
highlight Chart Type. The field will show Not Available, ChartView, or FliteCharts.
Sec 3
MFD
Chart Database Type
Sec 2
PFD
Determining Chart Database Type, Coverage,
and Currency
Sec 1
System
5.1.3
Foreword
Cycle Number and Revision
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during
a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the
GDU 620, the Power-up page indicates any of five different possible criteria for
chart availability. These indications are whether the databases are not configured,
not available, current, out of date, or disabled. See Table 5-5 for the various
FliteCharts Power-up page displays and the definition of each.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-3 ChartView Database Information
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-5
Index
Chart Coverage
The chart databases cover the area that was selected during the download
process. FliteCharts will note the region covered by the installed chart database;
ChartView does not.
Appendix A
Figure 5-4 FliteChart Database Information
Chart Currency
Database is active.
Database’s expiration date is the
current day. [1]
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The date currency of the installed chart databases are shown both during
power-up and on the AUX - System Status page.
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Database’s effective date is in the
future. [2]
Database’s effective date is the
current day. [1] [2]
Current date is unknown (e.g., no
GPS fix yet).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NOTE: Messages displayed in yellow also appear in a message banner
along the bottom of the Chart page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Database’s expiration date has
passed. Expired notes that the
database expired less than 70
days ago, but may still be used.
Database’s disable data has
passed. Disabled notes that the
database expired more than
70 days ago and is no longer
available for use.
System is verifying database
when new cycle is installed.
Database verification failed.
No database is installed.
5-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Power-up Page Display
Sec 2
PFD
1. When the effective or expiration date is the current day, the following
message is displayed at the bottom of the page: “Check local rules for
database effective times.”
Sec 1
System
Table 5-5 Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
Foreword
Definition
Blank Line. GDU 620 system is
not configured for any chart data.
Contact a Garmin-authorized
service center for configuration.
2. ChartView does not have “Effective” dates.
Sec 3
MFD
5.1.4
Selecting a Chart
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
5.1.4.1
Selecting FliteCharts or ChartView
When configured during installation and when both chart types are available,
you can select which chart type will be used. Only one chart type can be used
at a time.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The G500H will only allow the pilot to select the chart type in normal mode
if it is configured for ChartView. When in-air, the pilot cannot select the field
to change the chart source, and a small message is displayed underneath the
Chart Type line that reads “Chart Type can only be changed when on ground.”
The ability to select a chart type is absent from normal mode if configured for
FliteCharts.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: When the chart database synchronizes with another LRU, and
Chart Streaming is not available, a message banner at the bottom of the
Chart page displays “Getting newer charts.” This process can take several
minutes.
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-6 Chart NOTAM
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Chart Type sections.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select ChartView or FliteCharts.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-7
Figure 5-7 Changing Chart Type
5.1.4.2
Selecting a New Chart by FPL, NRST, or RECENT
You may select other charts to display based on your flight plan (FPL), charts
of the nearest airport (NRST), or your most recently selected airports (RECENT).
Foreword
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3. Press the ENT key to save the selected value.
4. Changing chart type requires a restart of the unit. With OK selected, press the
ENT key to restart the unit and change to the selected chart type.
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft
key.
2. Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to show FPL, NRST, or RECENT.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to select the desired identifier and then press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-8 Chart Category Selection
5-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
5.1.4.3
Selecting a Chart Manually
A chart for a different airport may be chosen by selecting the identifier for
the desired airport.
Airport Identifier Selection
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft key
to change the airport.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-9 Airport Identifier Selection
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Use the small MFD knob to change the character.
3. Use the large MFD knob to move the cursor to highlight a character.
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Press ENT to accept the selected airport.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-9
Chart Auto-Selection
The Chart page will automatically select a chart to display when the page is
opened.
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.1.4.4
Sec 2
PFD
• If an approach is loaded in the selected GPS navigator, the chart for that
approach will be displayed. In some cases, the pilot may be prompted to
select the correct chart from a list of possible matches.
Sec 3
MFD
• While on the ground, the nearest airport diagram will be displayed.
• If an approach is not loaded, the airport diagram for the destination
airport will be displayed.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• If no destination airport exists, the nearest airport diagram will be
displayed.
When the pilot has manually selected a chart to display, a different chart will
not be automatically selected until one of the following events occurs:
• The aircraft takes off or lands
• A new or different approach is loaded
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft key
to activate chart selection.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field to the right of the airport
identifier.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired chart.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Automatic chart selection only occurs when the Chart page is
opened. For example, if a new approach is loaded while the Chart page is
open, a different MFD page must be selected and the Chart page re-opened
for the new approach chart to be automatically displayed.
5-10
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-10 Activate Chart Selection for the Current Airport (ChartView shown)
Press ENT to accept and view the selected chart.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-11 Selected Chart for the Current Airport (ChartView shown)
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-11
Using Charts
More detail on the displayed chart can be viewed by zooming in with the
Range keys and moving the chart around with pan mode. The Detail soft key
allows access to more details for the currently displayed chart.
5.1.5.1
Chart Zooming and Panning
Chart zooming and panning allows viewing charts closer to examine details.
NOTE: Panning mode is indicated by the presence of scroll bars.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.1.5
Horizontal Scroll Bar
Figure 5-12 Zooming and Panning Around a Chart
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the RNG (Range)
keys to zoom in and out.
2. After zooming in, you may only see part of the chart. Press the small MFD knob
to enter Pan mode and activate scroll bars on the edges of the chart. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to move around the chart.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel the scroll bars and exit panning.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Vertical Scroll Bar
5-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.1.5.2
Viewing Chart Details in ChartView
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Foreword
NOTE: Chart details are only available for instrument approach procedure
charts. Chart details are not available for airport diagrams or SID/STAR
charts.
Sec 1
System
1. Press the Detail key to view detailed views of the current chart. The Detail key
is only available with ChartView.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-13 Selected Chart for the Current Airport (ChartView shown)
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-13
Foreword
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
2. Press the Header, Plan, Profile, or Minimums keys to view detailed
sections for the chart for those topics. An aircraft icon will show in the lower
right corner of the display if your aircraft is in the chart area.
3. Press the Back key to return to the view of the full chart.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-14 Detail of the Selected Chart (Header Shown)
5-14
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 1
System
2. With the Minimums Source highlighted, select the Altitude Minimums Alerter
source with small MFD knob.
Foreword
5.1.5.3
Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the Menu key. With
the Set Minimums item highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-15 Minimums Source Selection
Sec 3
MFD
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value and then
press ENT to activate the selected value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-16 Minimums Altitude Selection
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and
press the CLR key, it will turn the minimums functionality off.
Sec 7
Symbols
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft
reaches 150 feet above the MDA. The Minimum altitude will be available in the
Altitude Alerter.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-15
Foreword
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
5.1.5.4
Viewing Chart NOTAMs
If an active NOTAM (Notice to Airmen) exists for the selected chart, the
NOTAM soft key will be available. Press the NOTAM soft key to view the
NOTAM or select View NOTAMs from the Chart Options menu.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-17 Chart NOTAM
5-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.1.5.5
Day/Night View
Sec 1
System
When AUTO is selected, it allows the user to set a threshold for the transition
between the Day and Night color schemes.
Foreword
Chart pages can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night
viewing. The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment. The
Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment. .
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-18 Chart Color Scheme Auto Selection and Aux Display Brightness
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto
mode, the chart must be redrawn (zoomed in or out, or another chart
selected) before the switch from Day to Night is seen.
Sec 3
MFD
The threshold is compared to the Display Brightness Level that is displayed
on the Aux System Setup page. If the color scheme percentage on the Chart
Setup page is less than the display brightness percentage selected on the Aux
System Setup page, then the Chart AUTO Color Scheme will draw the chart as
though the NIGHT scheme were selected. Otherwise, the AUTO scheme will
draw the chart as though the DAY scheme were selected.
1. In the FPL page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the Chart page.
2. Press MENU to display the Options menu.
3. Press ENT to go to Chart Setup. The Color Scheme option will be highlighted.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select Day - AUTO - Night.
5. If Auto is selected, turn the large MFD knob CW to the percentage value and
turn the small MFD knob to change the value.
6. Press the small MFD knob or the ENT key to save the selected value and return
to the Chart page.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-17
SafeTaxi
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming
in on airports at close range. The airport display on the map reveals runways
with numbers, taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots,
and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other
prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the aircraft
location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges, an
aircraft symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced
position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting
taxiways and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Hot Spot
Outline
Aircraft
position
DCLTR Soft Key
Removes Taxiway
Markings
Figure 5-19 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the
requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport
moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by
the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot
situational awareness during ground operations.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Taxiway
Identification
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.2
5-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.2.1
Using SafeTaxi
• VOR Information Page
• Airport Information Page
• User Waypoint Information Page
Sec 2
PFD
• Intersection Information Page
Appendix A
2. Turn the MFD knobs to move the cursor on the Hot Spot border or into the Hot
Spot area and then press the ENT key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Hot Spots can contain more information about the area that can be displayed
when selected.
1. While viewing the Hot Spot area on the Navigation Map page, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Sec 7
Symbols
Hot Spot Information
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
5.2.1.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The DCLTR soft key (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and
DCLTR-3 each time the soft key is selected for easy recognition of decluttering
level. Selecting the DCLTR soft key removes the taxiway markings and airport
feature labels. Selecting the DCLTR-1 soft key removes VOR station ID, the VOR
symbol, and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the
DCLTR-2 soft key removes the airport runway layout, unless the airport in view
is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 soft key cycles back
to the original map detail. With Auto-Zoom enabled, the map will automatically
zoom to 1 NM and DCLTR-0 upon landing so SafeTaxi can be viewed. Refer to
Map Declutter Levels in the Navigation Map Section.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Decluttering
Sec 3
MFD
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to
taxiways, runways, and airport features. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown.
5.2.1.1
Sec 1
System
• Weather Datalink Page
Foreword
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi
airport layout within the maximum configured range. The following is a list of
pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• NDB Information Page
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-19
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Hot spot Name Location Info
Aircraft Location
Cursor
Hot Spot
Border
Figure 5-20 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Information
3. An information window will be shown on the MFD. After viewing, press the
small MFD knob, CLR, or ENT keys to remove the information window. Press
the small MFD knob again to cancel the cursor.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Hot Spot
Information
5-20
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.2.2
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available
for use after the expiration date. When turning on the GDU 620, the Power-up
Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the “SafeTaxi
Expires” date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the
“SafeTaxi Expires” date appears in yellow. The message “SafeTaxi: N/A” appears
in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card.
Sec 3
MFD
SafeTaxi Database Status
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-21 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the
database cycle can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. SafeTaxi
information appears in white and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in
white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the
effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in
yellow when expired. SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if
SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card. Expired SafeTaxi data is never
disabled.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-21
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM
WX Satellite Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A
Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The
GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any
altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available
on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances
without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites,
coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services
are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
https://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.
5.3.1
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either
one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID
or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite Radio to
activate the entertainment subscription. The SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions are included with the unit (also available at flyGarmin.com,
P/N 190-00355-04).
SiriusXM Satellite Radio and XM WX Satellite Weather subscriptions are sold
separately. It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather
service subscriptions with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation
signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment
programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be
located.
5-22
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
5.3.2
Sec 1
System
If XM WX Satellite weather services have not been activated, the weather
product names will be displayed in gray (see below) on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of
the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the
groupings of weather products available for subscription.
Foreword
NOTE: The LOCK soft key on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page
Group) is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio services are initially set up. It is not used during normal
SiriusXM Satellite Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects
if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev G, or later) for
further information.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Information
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the SiriusXM
Satellite radios, service class, and products when the GDL 69/69A is installed
and the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is activated. The Data and Audio radios
have separate Identification Numbers. The Service Class determines the features
that are available. Products that are not part of the subscription are displayed in
gray. Products that are part of the active subscription, but are waiting to receive
data are white. Products that are part of the active subscription and have data
are green.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-23
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. In the AUX page group, turn the small MFD knob to display SiriusXM Satellite
Radio Information.
2. The LOCK soft key is used to “lock” your XM subscription activation. This is
only used for the initial subscription or to make a change.
NOTE: Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev G, or later) for further information.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-22 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Information
5-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page.
Sec 1
System
The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to Aux Mode.
Foreword
Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GDU 620 serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. SiriusXM
Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signal
from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. When enabled,
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux page group.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Active Channel
Window
Channel Scroll Bar
Selected Channel
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Available Channel
Window
Sec 7
Symbols
Category Window
Volume Bar Graph
Sec 8
Glossary
Page Name
Soft Keys
Appendix A
Figure 5-23 SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-25
Channel Categories
The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio.
Categories of channels, such as Jazz, Rock, or News, can be selected to list the
available channels for a type of music or other contents.
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the CATGRY
soft key to activate Category selection.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired category. When the MFD knob
is turned to select a category, the soft keys will not be shown.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.3.1
Figure 5-24 XM Category List and Soft Keys
3. Press ENT to display the list of channels for the highlighted category in the
Channels window.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
OR
1. Press CATGRY and then the CAT + or CAT – soft keys to increment up or
down one category at a time.
2. Press ALL to show the channels for all categories. Use the large and small MFD
knobs to select desired channel.
3. Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel
selection.
5-26
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 1
System
Active Channel Number
Artist Name
Category
Foreword
5.3.3.2
Selecting a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel
The Channel feature is used to navigate through the channels in the selected
category.
Active Channel Name
Song Title
Sec 2
PFD
New Selected Channel
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Press ENT to make the highlighted channel the Active Channel.
2. Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel
selection.
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-27
Index
1. Press CHNL and then the DIR CH soft key to directly select a channel in the
active category. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel.
Appendix A
OR
1. Press CHNL and then the CH + or CH – soft keys to increment up or down one
channel at a time in the active category.
OR
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: A delay of several seconds may occur when selecting a channel.
The listed title may end before the radio begins playing the current Active
Channel material.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the small MFD
knob and then turn the small MFD knob to select the desired channel.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-25 XM Channel Selection
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume
The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level, as well as mute
the audio.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.3.3
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Volume Bar Graph
Volume Soft Key Label
Figure 5-26 XM Radio Volume Setting
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the VOL soft
key.
2. Press the VOL + or VOL – soft keys, or turn the small MFD knob, to adjust the
radio volume.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Volume Bar Graph
Volume Soft Key Labels
Figure 5-27 XM Radio Volume Controls
3. Press MUTE to mute the radio volume.
4. Press MUTE again or the VOL + or VOL – soft keys to unmute the radio
volume.
5-28
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.3.3.4
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets
Foreword
The PRESET soft key allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected
preset position for easy later recall. A delay of several seconds can occur when
setting or recalling a preset.
Sec 1
System
Active Channel
Number and Name
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Active Channel
and Song Title
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Feature Tip
Preset Soft Keys
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-28 XM Radio Presets
Setting a Preset
2. Press and hold a preset soft key, such as PS1.
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, you may set a preset
for the Active Channel. Press the PRESETS soft key.
Recalling a Preset
2. Press the preset soft key for the desired stored channel, such as PS1.
Appendix A
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the PRESETS
soft key.
3. Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-29
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
Troubleshooting
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the
possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is
installed has subscribed to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied
to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX System Status Page for Data Link Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number,
and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69/69A
the status will be marked with a red “X.”
1. Turn the large MFD knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the
AUX Page Group).
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Ensure the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated
GDL 69 Status OK
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
LRU Info Window
Index
Appendix A
Database Window
LRU or DBASE Selection
Figure 5-29 LRU Status Window
5-30
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
• Traffic Display
• Water
• Airport Signs
• Zero-Pitch Line
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Obstacle Alerting
Sec 3
MFD
• Horizon Heading Marks
Sec 2
PFD
The following HSVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Flight Path Marker
• Terrain Alerting
Sec 1
System
The optional Helicopter Synthetic Vision Technology (HSVT) is a visual
enhancement to the G500H. HSVT is displayed as a forward-looking display of
the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. HSVT information is shown
on the primary flight display (PFD). The depicted imagery is derived from the
aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features.
Foreword
5.4 Helicopter Synthetic Vision Technology
(Optional)
• Runway Display
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: HSVT will become disabled if the databases necessary to display
HSVT are unavailable (generating a GDU DB ERR or HSVT DISABLED alert)
or AHRS or GPS data is unavailable.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
HSVT offers a three-dimensional view of terrain and obstacles. Terrain and/
or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft in flight are shaded yellow or red.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-30 Synthetic Vision Imagery - PFD
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-31
Garmin HSVT is activated from the PFD using the soft keys located along
the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the soft keys turn the related function
on or off.
HSVT functions are displayed on three levels of soft keys. The PFD soft key
leads into the PFD function soft keys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the
SYN VIS soft key enables synthetic vision and displays the SYN TERR, HRZN
HDG, and APTSIGNS soft keys. The BACK soft key returns to the previous
level of soft keys.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
HSVT Operation
Sec 1
System
5.4.1
HRZN and APTSIGNS soft keys are dependent upon the state of the SYN
TERR soft key. When Synthetic Terrain is deactivated, the SYN TERR soft key
appears illuminated while the remaining HSVT soft keys are unavailable for
selection and subdued (black with dark-gray characters). If Synthetic Terrain is
deactivated, all other HSVT features are also deactivated. With Synthetic Terrain
activated, all other HSVT features may be turned on or off at the pilot’s discretion.
• HRZN HDG soft key enable horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS soft key enables airport signposts.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• SYN TERR soft key enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Index
Figure 5-31 HSVT Soft Keys
5-32
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.4.2
Activating and Deactivating HSVT
Sec 1
System
To enable HSVT:
1. Press the PFD soft key.
Foreword
NOTE: In some instances, such as temporary loss of GPS signal, the HSVT
functionality will be disabled.
2. Press the SYN VIS soft key.
When HSVT is enabled, the pitch ladder will display a different pitch scale.
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the SYN TERR soft key to view the HSVT display.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-32 Pitch Scale with HSVT Enabled
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-33 Pitch Scale with HSVT Disabled
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-33
HSVT Features
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.4.3
Traffic
Zero-Pitch Line
(ZPL) with Horizon
Heading Marks
Aircraft Symbol
Sec 5
Additional
Features
HSVT Soft Keys
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Synthetic Terrain
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Flight Path Marker
Figure 5-34 HSVT on Primary Flight Display
NOTE: HSVT features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude
deviation information using the CDI, VSI, and VDI presentations.
5.4.3.1
Flight Path Marker
The Flight Path Marker (FPM) is also known as a Velocity Vector. It is displayed
on the PFD at ground speeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts approximate
projected path of the aircraft.
5.4.3.2
Zero-Pitch Line
The Zero-Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and provides a
reference line by which to judge aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon. It
is not necessarily aligned with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain
is sloped or mountainous.
5-34
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.4.3.3
Horizon Heading
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows compass
headings in 30-degree increments on the Zero-Pitch Line. Horizon heading tick
marks and digits appearing on the zero-pitch line are not visible when they are
behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is activated and
deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG soft key.
Horizon Heading
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-35 Horizon Heading
Airport Signs
Sec 8
Glossary
Airport Sign with Identifier
(Between 4.5 NM and 9.0 NM)
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Heliport signs will not appear on the synthetic terrain display.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Airports Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and
identification on the synthetic terrain display. When activated, the signs appear
on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 NM from an airport and
disappear at approximately 4.5 NM. Airport signs are shown without the
identifier until the aircraft is approximately 9 NM from the airport. Airport signs
are shown behind the airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and
deactivated by pressing the APT SIGNS soft key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5.4.3.4
Airport Sign without Identifier
(Between 9 NM and 15 NM)
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-36 Airport Signs
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-35
Runway Depiction
Runways are shown on the PFD in various ways. Soft surface runways, such
as grass runways, are depicted in green. Hard surface runways, such as asphalt,
are depicted in gray. Your flight plan will determine how the runway is displayed
on the PFD.
Without a loaded flight plan, a runway is shown as dark gray with the
boundaries of the runway in light gray.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.4.3.5
Figure 5-37 Depiction of Runway with a Loaded Flight plan
A runway that is not in a loaded flight plan is shown as dark gray with no
other colors.
Runway
Figure 5-38 Depiction of Runway Not in Loaded Flight plan
A runway that is associated with an approach in the loaded flight plan is
outlined with a white rectangle, with the actual runway, in that rectangle.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Runway
Index
Runway
Figure 5-39 Depiction of Runway with Loaded Approach
5-36
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.4.3.6
Traffic
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate respective location as
determined by the related traffic systems. TIS, TAS and ADS-B traffic are all
displayed. Traffic is displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are
getting closer, and smaller when they are further away.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic on MFD
Traffic on PFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 5-40 Traffic Depiction on PFD and MFD
5-37
Foreword
Sec 1
System
5.4.3.7
Obstacles
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic display by two-dimensional tower
or windmill symbols found on the MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols
appear in the perspective view with relative height above terrain and distance
from the aircraft.
Sec 2
PFD
Obstacle Alert
Figure 5-41 Obstacle Depiction on PFD
Unlike the MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain
display do not change colors based on relative altitude but will be colored to
match any SVT TERRAIN or TAWS Alert from that obstacle. Obstacles greater
than 1,000 feet below the aircraft’s altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown
behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Obstacle
5-38
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Foreword
5.4.3.8
Field of View
The PFD Field of View can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page
lateral image. Two dashed lines forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol
on the MFD with an angle of approximately 50º represent the forward horizontal
field of view shown on the PFD.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
V-Shaped Lines
Depict PFD Field
of View (angle is
approx. 50°)
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-42 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-39
Foreword
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
To configure the Field of View:
1. While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map Page Group, press the
MENU key to display the PAGE MENU.
Figure 5-43 Page Menu
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Press the ENT key to bring up the setup page.
Field of View
Figure 5-44 Map Setup Items
3. Turn the large MFD knob to scroll through the options to FIELD OF VIEW.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off. Press the ENT key to confirm your
selection.
5. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-40
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
5.4.3.9
Unusual Attitudes
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display,
pointing to the direction to fly to correct the unusual attitude condition. The
display shows either a brown or blue band of color at the top or bottom of the
screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
Two conditions that inhibit HSVT and generate alerts on the PFD:
Sec 2
PFD
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
• The terrain database is out of date using an older terrain database card.
Sec 3
MFD
Blue Band - Sky
Representation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Full
Display
Terrain
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 5-45 Unusual Attitude Display - Blue Band
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-41
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Brown Band - Ground
Representation
Figure 5-46 Unusual Attitude Display - Brown Band
5-42
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.5
GFC 600H Operation
Heading Select Mode
Vertical Speed Control
Selected Airspeed
FCS Navigation
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-43
Index
The HSI is used with the NAV or APR modes of the GFC 600H. The
GDU 620 provides the FCS with the selected course and lateral/vertical
deviations. The GDU 620 is a switching source between the installed navigation
sources (e.g GPS/VLOC, 1-2). The navigation source that is displayed on the HSI
is sent to the autopilot.
Appendix A
5.5.5
Sec 8
Glossary
The selected airspeed bug only appears when the FCS is in IAS mode. The
selected airspeed is only adjustable using the GFC 600H.
Sec 7
Symbols
5.5.4
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The GDU 620 vertical speed bug controls vertical speed
when the FCS is coupled in VS mode. The vertical speed bug displays on the
GDU 620 only when the vertical speed mode is selected on the GFC 600H. For
more information on setting the vertical speed bug, refer to section 2.5.1.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5.5.3
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The GDU 620 altitude bug is used to automatically capture a selected altitude
when the FCS is coupled in VS or IAS modes. Adjust the altitude bug in the
normal manner when using the altitude capture interface. The altitude preselect
bug is always present. For more information on setting the altitude capture bug,
refer to section 2.4.1.
Sec 3
MFD
Altitude Capture
Sec 2
PFD
The GDU 620 heading bug displays on the HSI. When coupled in HDG mode,
the FCS will command banks as necessary to maintain the selected heading. The
heading bug is always present. For more information on setting the heading bug,
refer to section 2.6.1.
5.5.2
Sec 1
System
5.5.1
Foreword
The G500H interfaces to the GFC 600H to provide the functions described
in this section. Refer to the Rotocraft Flight Manual and GFC 600H Pilot Guide,
or autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot
functions.
If the FCS is decoupled from the flight director, then flight director cues
are presented on the PFD. The GFC 605H Mode controller controls the flight
director and there are no pilot controls or adjustments available on the G500H.
A dual cue flight director is displayed on the PFD. The G500H system limits
the distance the flight director pitch commands may deviate from the aircraft
attitude icon. If the Pitch command provided by the FCS is greater than the
distance allowed by the G500H, the command bars display at the maximum
distance allowed by the G500H. As the aircraft pitch changes to satisfy the
command bars, the bars continue to display at the maximum distance from the
aircraft attitude icon until the aircraft pitch deviation is within the command
display limit.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Flight Director Display
Sec 1
System
5.5.6
Figure 5-47 Dual Cue Flight Director
5.5.7
Autopilot Mode Annunciations
The GFC 600H mode annunciations are located at the top of the Primary
Flight Display.
5-44
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Servo
Status
Coupled
Status
Vertical
Modes
Active
Armed
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-48 HFCS Status Annunciations on Garmin GDU 620 PFD
PFT
Definition
Preflight Test in Process
FCS
Preflight Test Failure or FCS System Failure
FTR
Force Trim Release switch is pressed (more than 3 seconds)
YAW
YAW Axis Failure
Sec 3
MFD
Status
Sec 5
Additional
Features
P
P
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
Table 5-50 Servo Status
Appendix A
R
R
Servo engaged and out of detent. If in Standby (FCS
OFF), this indicates an active limit cue.
• Servo engaged and out of detent (more than 10
seconds)
• Flashing inverse video
• Keeps flashing until returned to detent
• Transition from servos engaged to servos disengaged
• Flashing inverse video for 5 seconds
Sec 8
Glossary
R Y P
R Y P
Definition
Servo engaged and in detent
Sec 7
Symbols
R Y P
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
RYP
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Table 5-49 Autopilot Status
Status
Sec 1
System
Active
Armed
Selected
Altitude
Foreword
Autopilot Status
(PFT, FCS, or FTR
annunciation)
5-45
Foreword
Status
CPLD
Sec 1
System
CPLD CPLD
ATT
Definition
Servos coupled to Flight Director
Transition from Coupled to Decoupled
Attitude Hold
The mode flashes yellow when there is an abnormal loss of the mode, see
GFC 600H Pilot’s Guide for details. When the autopilot transitions from one
mode to another the text flashes green.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Table 5-51 Coupled Status
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Mode
ALT
ALTS
ATT
GP
GS
GSPD
IAS
LVL
VS
Annunciation
Altitude Hold
Selected Altitude Capture
Attitude
Glidepath
Glideslope
Ground Speed
Indicated Airspeed
Level Hold
Vertical Speed
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 5-52 Vertical Mode Annunciations
5-46
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
LVL
VAPP
VOR
Attitude
Backcourse Navigation
• GPS Approach
• GPS Navigation
Ground Speed
Heading
• Localizer Approach
• Localizer Navigation
Level Hold
VOR Approach
VOR Navigation
Sec 1
System
GSPD
HDG
LOC
Annunciation
Foreword
Mode
ATT
BC
GPS
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Table 5-53 Lateral Mode Annunciations
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
5-47
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
5-48
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
6.1
Alerts
Foreword
6
Sec 7
Symbols
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
AHRS(1/2) CAL
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
ADC(1/2)
SERVICE
ADC CONFIG
• Alert is enabled
and the ADC is
reporting that
altitude correction is
unavailable.
• ADC 1 or ADC 2
requires service.
• ADC configuration
error.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
calibration version
error.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
ADC(1/2) ALT EC • ADC 1 or ADC 2
Altitude Error
Correction is
unavailable.
Action
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Description
Sec 3
MFD
Alert Message
Sec 2
PFD
The MFD ALERTS page may have two additional soft keys (TRND/ACK
and CAPTURE) which are present when interfaced to an optional ADAS+
Engine Trend Monitor (ETM). Pressing the TRND/ACK soft key is equivalent
to pressing the ETM Trend key for one second. Pressing the CAPTURE soft
key is equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for five seconds. Refer to
the Rotorcraft Flight Manual and ADAS+ ETM documentation for the system
description and operating procedures.
Sec 1
System
Alerts are displayed on the MFD and are accessible via the ALERTS MFD
soft key. When a new advisory is present, the ALERTS soft key text changes to
ADVISORY and flashes until the alerts page is viewed.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-1
AHRS(1/2) GPS
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
is not receiving any
GPS information.
Action
• Verify that navigators are on and
have a GPS signal.
• Verify that self-test mode is not
enabled.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2 is
not receiving backup
GPS information.
AHRS(1/2) SRVC
• Two GPS devices
are configured as
present and AHRS1
is not receiving GPS
data from the backup
(2nd) device.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
• Upgrade AHRS magnetic field
magnetic-field model
model.
needs update.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Description
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
is operating
• Check the RFMS for limitations.
exclusively in no-GPS
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
reversionary mode.
service.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
is using the backup
GPS source.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
6-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 1
System
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
is not receiving true
airspeed from the
ADC.
Action
Foreword
AHRS(1/2) TAS
Description
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
AUD SYS FAIL
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 7
Symbols
ARINC 429
CONFIG
ARINC 708
CONFIG
AUD NOT AVAIL
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
ALT NO COMP
Sec 5
Additional
Features
ALT KEY INOP
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Reload MAG DB.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
AHRS MAG DB
Sec 3
MFD
AHRS CONFIG
• Additional loss of
GPS data will cause
loss of heading and
attitude data.
• AHRS configuration
error.
• AHRS/GDU magnetic
field model database
version mismatch.
• The ALT key function
is disabled. ALT key
not available.
• No data from one
or more altitude
sensors.
• ARINC 429
configuration error.
• ARINC 708
configuration error.
• Audio system is not
available.
• Audio system failure.
Sec 2
PFD
• Displayed heading
and attitude data is
still valid.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-3
AVTN DB
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
CHT DB ERR
CHT STREAM
CNFG
MISMATCH
CNFG MODULE
Action
• Reduced functionality • Install the missing database.
due to missing
• Reinsert the datacard, if necessary.
aviation database.
• Datacard may have
been ejected.
• Calibration data is
lost.
• Datacard’s charts
database is
incomplete. Some
charts may be
unavailable.
• Chart streaming
is not available.
GDU reverts to the
datacard’s charts.
• GDU 1-2 airframe
configuration settings
disagree.
• GDU configuration
module is
inoperative.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Reload charts database.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
CAL LOST
Description
6-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
• ADS-B fault: UAT
receiver.
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Foreword
DATALINK
Description
Sec 1
System
• ADS-B fault: 1090
receiver.
• FIS-B weather has
failed.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
• GDL 88H ADS-B
Failure. Unable to
transmit ADS-B
messages.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• GDL 88H ADS-B
fault.
• GDL 88H needs
service.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• GDL 88H ADS-B is
not transmitting
position. Check GPS
devices.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
• GDL 88H control
panel input fault.
Check transponder
mode.
Sec 8
Glossary
• GDL 88H ADS-B fault.
Pressure altitude
source inoperative.
Appendix A
• GDL 88H external
traffic system
inoperative or
connection is lost.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-5
Sec 2
PFD
• GDL 88H CSA failure.
• GDL 88H external
traffic system has a
low battery.
Sec 3
MFD
Appendix A
Index
Action
• GDL 88H is inoperative
or connection to
GDU is lost.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Description
DATALINK (cont) • GDL 88H
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
configuration module
service.
needs service.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
DATA LOST
DB ERR
DB SYNC
COMPLETE
• GDL 88H external
traffic system in
standby for more
than 60 seconds.
• Pilot stored data
is lost. All pilot
configurable items
return to their default
settings.
• Database found on
top card.
• Database sync
complete.
• Confirm the data is lost.
• Reconfigure all personal settings.
• Remove database card or move
card to bottom slot.
• Restart GDU.
• Restart required to
use new databases.
DB SYNC
• No database card
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
DISABLED
found to receive
service.
databases.
DB SYNC ERROR • Not enough space to • Contact a Garmin dealer for
receive one or more
service.
databases.
6-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
DSCRT CONFIG
• ADAS+ engine
monitoring system is
recording trend data.
• Engine Trend Monitor • Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
exceedance/advisory.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• ADAS+ engine
monitoring system is
reporting an
exceedance or
advisory condition.
• Engine Trend Monitor • Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
needs service.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
ETM FAULT
Sec 3
MFD
ETM EXCEED
sensors is halted or
lost.
• Engine Trend Monitor • Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
data capture.
Sec 2
PFD
ETM CAPTURE
• System is in
Diagnostic mode.
• Discrete input/output • Contact a Garmin dealer for
configuration error.
service.
• Configuration error. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Communication with
Sec 1
System
ENG SENSOR
UNIT (1/2)
Action
Foreword
DIAG MODE
Description
Sec 8
Glossary
• ADAS+ engine
monitoring system is
reporting a system
fault.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-7
FAN (1/2) FAIL
Description
• Cooling fan no. 1 or
no. 2 has failed.
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Unit may operate
at extreme
temperatures
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Extended operation
at high temperatures
is not recommended
as damage to the
GDU may occur.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• PFD/MFD coloration
may be incorrect.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Backlight may dim
to reduce power and
heat.
6-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Yaw Rate Deviation
fault.
• AHRS A429 Attitude
Timeout fault.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 2
PFD
• Roll Deviation fault.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 1
System
• GAD 43
communication is
lost.
• Gyro Emulation Type
Mismatch fault.
• Yaw Rate Scale
Factor Mismatch
fault.
• GDU AHRS Monitor
fault.
• Pitch Deviation fault.
Action
Foreword
GAD 43
Description
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-9
GAD 43
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
• Application SCI
integrity fault.
• Configuration
integrity fault.
• Calibration integrity
fault.
• Unit fault.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GAD 43E
CONFIG
• GAD 43e
configuration error.
GATE MODE
• Communication is
halted.
• Automated testing
is on.
• GDL 69 has failed.
GDL69
Index
Appendix A
• AHRS A429 Attitude
Invalid fault.
• AHRS Pitch Out of
Range fault.
• AHRS Attitude Invalid
fault.
• AHRS A429 Heading
Timeout fault.
• AHRS A429 Heading
Invalid fault.
• Power Supply fault.
• AC reference is lost.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Description
6-10
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Configuration is
required.
• GWX requires
service.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
in no-magnetometer
reversionary mode.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Check RFMS for limitations.
• Heading fault occurs
on the AHRS.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
HDG FAULT
• GWX configuration
error.
• Use an alternate navigation
source.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GWX SERVICE
• Check the RFMS for limitations.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
GWX CONFIG
• Operation in extreme
north latitudes has
rendered the heading
data unreliable.
• Communication with
GPS 1 or GPS 2 is
lost.
• Timing data from
GPS 1 or GPS 2 is
lost.
• GSR has failed.
Sec 3
MFD
GSR FAIL
• Return to a geographic position
within the reliable operating area,
or use an alternate means of
navigation.
Sec 2
PFD
GPS(1/2) PPS
FAIL
• AHRS 1 is too far
north or south. No
magnetic heading
provided.
Sec 1
System
GPS(1/2) FAIL
Action
Foreword
GEO LIMITS
Description
Sec 8
Glossary
• Use a compass or other course
information.
Appendix A
• Heading data is
unreliable.
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-11
HDG LOST
HTAWS N/A
IAS NO COMP
LIMIT CUE
DISABLED
LOWSPD
<LRU> CAL
<LRU> CONFIG
Description
Action
• HDG features are
disabled or defaulted
to GPS1 TRK.
• GDU is in
reversionary
track-based mode.
• External HTAWS is
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
not available. Internal
service.
TERRAIN-HSVT
alerting is enabled.
• External TAWS
configuration
mismatch.
• No data from one
or more airspeed
sensors.
• Limit cueing is not
available. Autopilot
is unable to support
functionality.
• Pilot has turned the
function off.
• Underspeed
Protection is active.
• Error in the
calibration of the
indicated LRU.
• Error in the
configuration of the
indicated LRU.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Informational only. No action
necessary.
• Calibration service required.
Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Config service required. Contact a
Garmin dealer for service.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
6-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
Description
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
• Replace or update database.
Sec 2
PFD
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 7
Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
• No data from the
indicated navigation
receiver.
NO RADAR DATA • No data is being sent • Contact a Garmin dealer for
to the GDU.
service.
Appendix A
• Switch to alternate form of
navigation (GPS or otherwise), if
available.
Sec 8
Glossary
<LRU> COOLING • The indicated LRU
has insufficient
cooling. Display
is automatically
dimmed to reduce
power usage.
<LRU> DB ERR • Error exists with
the indicated LRU
database.
<LRU> KEYSTK • The indicated LRU
key is stuck.
<LRU> SERVICE • The indicated LRU
requires service.
<LRU> VOLTAGE • The indicated
LRU has low
voltage. Display
is automatically
dimmed to reduce
power usage.
MANIFEST
• LRU software
mismatch.
Communication is
halted.
MAXSPD
• Overspeed Protection
is active.
NAV(1/2)
• Communication with
NAV 1 or NAV 2 is
lost.
Action
6-13
PIT NO COMP
PREV EXCEED
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
ROL NO COMP
RS-232 CONFIG
Sec 7
Symbols
RADAR
CONTROLS
DISAGREE
REGISTER GFDS
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
RS-485 CONFIG
SD CARD 2
SIMULATOR
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
SD CARD 1
6-14
Description
• No data from one or
more pitch attitude
sensors.
• Previous Engine
Trend Monitor
exceedance.
• ADAS+ engine
trend monitor is
reporting a previous
exceedance.
• Data does not match
for a duration of 15
seconds or longer.
• Data services are
inoperative. GFDS is
not registered.
• No data from one
or more roll attitude
sensors.
• RS-232 configuration
error.
• RS-485 configuration
error.
• Top SD card disabled
due to errors.
• Bottom SD card
disabled due to
errors.
• Simulator mode is
active. Do not use for
navigation.
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Register with GFDS.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Replace card.
• Replace card.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Alert Message
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Repeat steps to reactivate SVT
with the appropriate PFD soft keys.
•
TERRAIN DSP
•
TRAFFIC
•
Appendix A
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 8
Glossary
• Traffic device is
inoperative or
connection to GDU
is lost.
TRAFFIC CONFIG • ADS-B traffic data
does not match
configuration.
Sec 7
Symbols
• TAS/TCAS has been
in standby for more
than 60 seconds or
has failed.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
•
Sec 5
Additional
Features
TDB
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
•
Sec 3
MFD
SW MISMATCH
Sec 2
PFD
• Install 9 arc-second database
(GDU 620 SW v6.21 or earlier) or
4.9 arc second database
(GDU 620 SW v7.00 or later).
GDU software
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
version mismatch. No
service.
GDU crossfill.
Airframe does not
support Terrain
database.
Terrain/obstacle
• Update database.
database error.
ADS-B In traffic
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
alerting has failed.
service.
ADS-B In traffic has
failed.
• Terrain database
resolution is too low.
Sec 1
System
SVT DISABLED
• Stormscope has
failed or connection
is lost.
• Outside of terrain
database coverage
area.
Action
Foreword
STORMSCOPE
Description
6-15
TRAFFIC FAIL
Description
• Traffic device has
failed.
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Traffic data will no
longer be displayed.
TRAFFIC STDBY
• Traffic is in Standby • Check traffic system controls on
mode while airborne.
the MFD Traffic Map page or traffic
system.
TRK LOST
• Heading and track
from active GPS is
lost. HSI is using
secondary GPS track.
TRK TRAFFIC
• Heading is lost.
Traffic is now based
on track.
WX ALERT
• Possible severe
• Check weather radar.
weather ahead.
WX RADAR
• Communication with • Contact a Garmin dealer for
weather radar is lost.
service.
WX RDR SERVICE • Weather radar
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
requires service.
WXR INPUT
• Weather radar is
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
FAULT
service.
not receiving one or
more inputs.
XPDR (1/2)
• GTX 1 or GTX 2
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
requires service.
• GTX 1 or GTX 2
is inoperative or
connection to GDU
is lost.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Index
Table 6-1 Alert Messages
6-16
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
6.2
System Status
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The System Status page of Aux mode shows the status, serial number, and
software version of LRUs and the date of databases. There are no menu pages.
In the LRU Status column, a green check means the unit is present and operating properly, while a red “X” indicates an absence or failure.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Database Sync
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Active Databases
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
System LRUs
Figure 6-2 System Status Displays
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
6-17
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
6-18
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
7
SYMBOLS
Map Page Symbols
Symbol
Sec 1
System
7.1
Foreword
The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the MFD Map
displays.
Description
Sec 2
PFD
Unknown Airport
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Sec 3
MFD
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Towered, Serviced Airport
Soft Surface, Serviced Airport
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Soft Surface, Non-serviced Airport
Private Airport
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Heliport
Sec 7
Symbols
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
VOR
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
VOR/DME
ILS/DME or DME-only
VORTAC
TACAN
VRP (Visual Reporting Point)
Index
User Airport
User Waypoint
Table 7-1 Map Page Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
7-1
Foreword
7.2
SafeTaxi Symbols
Sec 1
System
Symbol
Description
Helipad
Sec 2
PFD
Airport Beacon
Sec 3
MFD
Under Construction Zones
Table 7-2 SafeTaxi Symbols
7.3
Traffic Symbols
Symbol
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Designated Water Areas
Description
(Highest to Lowest Priority)
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic Advisory (TA), In Range
Traffic Advisory (TA), Out of Range
Sec 8
Glossary
Proximate Advisory (PA)
Appendix A
Other Traffic
Index
Table 7-3 Traffic Symbols
7-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Symbol
Description
Foreword
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Sec 1
System
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximate Directional Traffic
Sec 3
MFD
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Directional Surface Vehicle
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne/
on-ground status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the
surface vehicles).
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 7-4 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
7-3
Foreword
7.4
Basemap Symbols
Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Interstate Highway
State Highway
Sec 2
PFD
US Highway
Sec 3
MFD
National Highway - 2-digit drawn inside
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Small City or Town
Medium City
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Large City
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 7-5 Basemap Symbols
7-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
7.5
Map Tool Bar Symbols
Foreword
Symbol
Description
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator
Sec 1
System
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Sec 2
PFD
Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
StormScope
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic Enabled and Available Indicator
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Ownship is receiving TIS-B and ADS-R services
(Software version 5.11 or earlier)
Possible incomplete traffic picture – ownship is not receiving one (or
both) of the TIS-B or ADS-R services (Software version 5.11 or earlier)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
StormScope Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Traffic Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 7-6 Map Tool Bar Symbols
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
7-5
Foreword
7.6
Ownship Symbols
Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
2-Blade Rotorcraft
3-Blade Rotorcraft
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
4-Blade Rotorcraft
Table 7-7 Ownship Symbols
7.7
Miscellaneous Symbols
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Description
Arrow
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Symbol
Measuring Cursor
Default Map Cursor
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
MFD Wind Vector (w/ valid GPS solution)
PFD Wind Vector styles
Sec 7
Symbols
Parallel Track Waypoint
Restricted/Prohibited/Warning/Alert
Sec 8
Glossary
TFR (Temporary Flight Restrictions)
MOA
Appendix A
Class B Airspace
Class C Airspace
Index
Class D Airspace
Airspace Altitude Label (Upper/Lower Limits)
Table 7-8 Miscellaneous Symbols
7-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
8
GLOSSARY
Foreword
active, activate
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
Automatic Flight Following
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
altitude
autopilot
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
airspeed
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
BARO
BC
Bearing
barometric setting
backcourse
The compass direction from the present position to a
destination waypoint
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course Deviation Indicator
channel
cloud
clear
configuration
The line between two points to be followed by the
aircraft
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
8-1
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 3
MFD
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
BRG
C
ºC
CDI
CHNL
CLD
CLR
CONFIG
Course
Sec 1
System
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADS-B
AFF
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AP
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
AS
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
AUX
AWOS
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Crosstrack Error
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
CUM
D ALT
DB, DBASE
DCLTR, DECLTR
deg
DEP
Desired Track (DTK)
DEST
DFLT
DIS
Distance
DME
DP
DPRT
DSBL
DTK
EDR
ELEV
EMI
ENR
En Route Safe Altitude
ENT
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
ºF
FAA
FCC
8-2
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
direction, left or right
course
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
density altitude
database
declutter
degree
departure
The desired course between the active “from” and
“to” waypoints
destination
default
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to
a destination waypoint
Distance Measuring Equipment
Departure Procedure
departure
disabled
Desired Track
Excessive Descent Rate
elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
en route
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles
left or right of the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
enter
error
En route Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time En Route
degrees Fahrenheit
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Communication Commission
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
forecast
flight director
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
flight plan
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
G/S, GS
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEO
GLS
GMA
GMT
GMU
GPS
GPSS
Ground Speed
glideslope
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
geographic
Global Navigation Satellite Landing System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Global Positioning System
GPS Roll Steering
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a
ground position
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
Garmin Transponder
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
8-3
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. M
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon
indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Hertz
Sec 3
MFD
HFOM
Hg
hPa
HPL
HSDB
HSI
Hz
Sec 2
PFD
HDG
Heading
Sec 1
System
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
Foreword
FCST
FD
FIS-B
FISDL
FLTA
FPL
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
IAF
ICAO
IFR
IGRF
ILS
IMC
IOI
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
ITI
Initial Approach Fix
International Civil Aviation Organization
Instrument Flight Rules
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Imminent Obstacle Impact
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Imminent Terrain Impact
L
LAT
LCD
LCL
LED
Leg
LIFR
LNAV
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
LRU
LT
LTNG
left, left runway
latitude
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Lateral Navigation
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
Line Replacement Unit
left
lightning
MAG
MAG VAR
MapMX
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
A proprietary data format used to forward navigation
information from the Garmin GPS units to the GDU
620
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
minimum
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
METAR
MFD
MIN
8-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Minimum Safe Altitude
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
PA
PC
PDA
PFD
P. POS
PTK
Proximity Advisory
personal computer
Premature Descent Alert
Primary Flight Display
Present Position
parallel track
QTY
quantity
R
RAIM
RAM
REF
REQ
REV
RFM
RFMS
RMI
RNG
right, right runway
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
random access memory
reference
required
reverse, revision, revise
Rotorcraft Flight Manual
Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
Radio Magnetic Indicator
range
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
OAT
OBS
Sec 2
PFD
navigation
NAVigation AID
Negative Climb Rate
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Sec 1
System
NAV
NAVAID
NCR
NDB
NEXRAD
Foreword
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
8-5
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
RNWY
ROC
RT
RTC
runway
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
right
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SRVC, SVC
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYS
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
slip/skid
symbol
speed
service
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEMP
TERM
TFR
T HDG
TIS
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
temperature
terminal
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
8-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 7
Symbols
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
weather
transponder
cross-track
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WX
XPDR
XTK
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VS
VSI
velocity (airspeed)
variation
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and
tactical air navigation
Vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
V, Vspeed
VAR
VFR
VHF
VLOC
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOR
VORTAC
Sec 3
MFD
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar
Stereographic Grid
Sec 2
PFD
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Sec 1
System
TRK
TRSA
Terminal Maneuvering Area
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground
position; also ‘Ground Track’
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Foreword
TMA
Topo
Track
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
8-7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
8-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
APPENDIX A
Foreword
A.1
DATABASES
SD Card Use and Databases
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Inserting an SD Card
1. Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with
the face of the display bezel).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A.1.1 for instructions on updating the aviation
database.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Ensure the GDU 620 is powered off before inserting or removing
an SD card.
Sec 3
MFD
The unit will generate an error in the event that a database SD card is inserted
into the top slot. Aviation databases can be loaded from an SD card in either slot.
If the aviation database on the SD card is more than two cycles expired, and the
pilot declines the system’s prompt to update the aviation database, the system
will provide a second prompt that allows the pilot to suppress future prompts to
update to that particular aviation database on that SD card.
Sec 2
PFD
SD cards are required for Terrain, Obstacle, FliteChart, SafeTaxi, and
ChartView, and Aviation database storage as well as Aviation, Jeppesen aviation
and ChartView database updates. For database updates, the database update
datacard must be inserted in the top SD card slot while the appropriate database
card is located in the lower SD card slot. ChartView is an optional feature that
requires enablement by a Garmin dealer.
Sec 1
System
The G500H System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various
types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards are required for database
storage as well as database updates.
2. To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Aviation
Function
Airport, NAVAID,
Waypoint, and
Airspace information
Where
Stored
Update
Cycle
Provider
Notes
Internal
28 days (on
GDU 620 Thursdays)
memory or
SD card
fly.garmin.com Updates installed via
SD card and copied
into internal memory
IGRF model AHRS magnetic
variation model
Internal
AHRS
memory
5 years
fly.garmin.com Included with
Aviation database
SafeTaxi
Airport surface
diagrams
SD card
56 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com
Terrain
Topographic map,
SVT, Terrain/TAWS
SD card
As required
fly.garmin.com 9 arc-second or
higher resolution
required for SVT
Obstacle
Obstacle information
for map, SVT, and
TAWS
SD card
56 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com
Basemap
Boundary and road
information
Internal
As required
Memory or
SD card
fly.garmin.com
Airport
Directory
Airport facility and
FBO information
SD card
56 days
fly.garmin.com Database may be
available in different
versions. Update
cycle and content
may vary.
FliteCharts
FAA-published
terminal procedures
SD card
28 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com Disables 180 days
after expiration date.
ChartView
Jeppesen terminal
procedures
SD card
14 days (on
Fridays)
Contact
Jeppesen
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Database
Name
Optional feature
that requires Garmin
dealer enablement.
Disables 70 days
after expiration date.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table A-1 Database List
A-2
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
A.1.1
Aviation Databases
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. Verify the correct update cycle is loaded during power-up. Press the ENT key to
continue or the CLR key to cancel loading.
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the G500H System ON.
Sec 2
PFD
Updating the Aviation Database
1. With the G500H System OFF, insert the SD card containing the aviation
database update into the upper card slot of the GDU 620 to be updated (label
of SD card should face up).
Sec 1
System
The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle. The
ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. ChartView is an
optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer. Contact Jeppesen
(www.jeppesen.com) for ChartView subscription and update information.
Foreword
The aviation database is updated on a 28 day cycle. Aviation database updates
are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin website
fly.garmin.com onto a Garmin provided Supplemental datacard. Contact Garmin
at fly.garmin.com for navigation database updates and update kits. The Aviation
database is stored on an SD card. This datacard is used to transfer the database
from the top SD card slot to the datacard located in the bottom SD card slot.
Removal of the datacard in the bottom SD card slot is not required.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-2 Database Initialization Display
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-3
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4. A notice on the display will indicate successful updating of the database.
5. The following display will show the databases and their current status.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure A-3 Database Loading Completed
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-4 Database Information on the Splash Screen
6. Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then small MFD
knob to reach the System Status Page.
7. Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the “DATABASE” window.
8. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases
are current and there are no errors. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is
either expired or the G500H can not determine the date.
9. Power down the GDU 620.
A-4
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
A.1.2
Garmin Databases
Appendix A
Index
A-5
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• FliteCharts – The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the
United States only. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated
within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts no longer functions.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• SafeTaxi – The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams
for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control
instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in
relation to taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database
is updated on a 56-day cycle. SafeTaxi will still be shown after it has expired.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Obstacle – The obstacles database contains data for obstacles, such as
towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and
higher are included in the obstacle database. The rotorcraft database
includes all reported obstacles regardless of height. It is very important to
note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not
be contained in the obstacle database. This database is updated on a 56day cycle. Obstacles will still be shown after the database has expired.
Several obstacle database options are available. Obstacle databases created
for GTN software version 5.10 or later include all power lines or only HOT
lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous
Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are power lines that are co-located
with other FAA-identified obstacles. The installed obstacle database type
can be verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for
the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Sec 3
MFD
• Terrain – The terrain database contains terrain mapping data. This database
is updated periodically and has no expiration date.
Sec 2
PFD
• Aviation – The aviation database contains airport, airspace, NAVAID, and
waypoint information. This database is updated on a 28 day cycle.
Sec 1
System
The following GDU 620 databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards
provided by Garmin:
Foreword
WARNING: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases
comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and crossvalidates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness
of the data.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Since these databases are not stored internally in the GDU 620, a Supplemental
Data Card containing identical database versions must be kept in each display
unit for dual installations. After subscribing to the desired database product,
the database product will need to be downloaded to a Supplemental Data Card.
Insert the Supplemental Data Card into the lower card slot shown in Figure
A-4. The Supplemental Data Card should not be removed except to update the
databases stored on the card. The upper slot is typically used for updating the
navigation database and is then normally left open. The Navigation card may be
inserted in either slot, but should use the same slot each time.
Navigation Database SD Update Card
Navigation, Terrain, Obstacles, Airports,
SafeTaxi, Charts (FliteChart or ChartView)
Database SD Card
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Airport Directory (optional) – The airport directory database contains
airport facility and FBO information. This database is optional and “N/A”
will be displayed in white text on the startup screen if the database is not
installed. This database may be available in multiple versions with varying
update cycles and/or content.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure A-5 SD Card Database Location
The Garmin databases can be updated by following the instructions detailed
in the “Navigation Databases” section of the Garmin web site (fly.garmin.com).
Once the updated files have been downloaded from the web site, a PC equipped
with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. The following equipment
is required to perform the update:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or Windows
7 recommended)
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card
reader
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin web site
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Card (P/N 010-00769-xx)
It may be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized
service facility in order to use certain database features.
A-6
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
4.
Sec 1
System
3.
Foreword
1.
2.
Sec 3
MFD
Updating Garmin Databases
Download the data to the data cards from the appropriate web site.
Insert the Database SD card in an empty card slot of the GDU 620. The SD card
containing the Aviation, ChartView, FliteCharts, SafeTaxi, or any other database
must be inserted into the lower slot on the GDU 620.
Apply power to the G500H System. View the MFD power-up splash screen.
Check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the splash screen.
When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an “in progress” message
may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading
before proceeding. Some databases can take up to 15 minutes to update.
Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT key or the
right-most soft key. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or
the G500H can not determine the date.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
A-7
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Appendix A
5. Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then the small
MFD knob to reach the System Status Page.
6. Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the “DATABASE” window.
7. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases
are current and there are no errors.
8. Power down the GDU 620.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-6 Database Information on the Splash Screen
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
A-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
INDEX
1-2 key 2-3
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
B
Sec 7
Symbols
Backcourse 2-27, 2-29
Backlighting 1-25
Baro-corrected altitude 2-17
Barometric minimum 2-18
Barometric pressure 2-16, 1-19, 1-24,
3-37,
Basemap symbols 7-4, 7-6
Beacon 7-1, 7-2
Bearing information 2-32, 2-33
Bearing line 2-33
Bearing Pointers 2-26, 2-32
Best glide 2-8
Bezel keys 1-17, 1-19
BRG 1-2 2-4
Appendix A
Index
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 2
PFD
Activating XM 5-22
Active flight plan 2-18, 3-1, 3-65, 3-66,
3-67
Additional features 5-1
ADF 1-1, 1-2, 2-2, 2-4, 2-32, 8-1
ADIZ 3-5, 3-10, 3-24
ADS-B 4-38
AFF
Age 4-47
AHRS , 1-2, 1-4, 3-34, 6-2, 6-8, 6-10,
Aircraft symbol 2-8, 2-21, 3-3
Air Data Computer 1-4
AIREP 4-101, 4-119
AIRMETs 4-48, 4-63, 4-99, 4-116
Airport beacon 7-2
Airport diagram 5-3, 5-4, A-5
Airport Directory 3-74, A-6
Airport signs 2-5, 5-35
Airspace labels 3-25
Airspeed Indicator 1-23, 2-6, 2-7
Airspeed reference 2-8, 1-23, 3-29,
Airspeed tape 2-7, 2-20, 3-29,
Airspeed trend vector 2-6
Air temperature 1-4, 1-8, 2-1
Airways 3-2, 3-5, 3-10, 3-24
Alerts 2-15, 2-18, 3-67, 4-19, 4-32, 4-35,
6-1
Altimeter i, 2-13, 2-16
Altitude 1-1, 1-4, 1-17, 1-24, 2-15, 2-18,
3-27, 4-4, 3-34, 3-36, 3-67,
Altitude alerter 2-15, 5-15
Altitude alerting 2-15
Altitude Bug 1-17, 2-1, 2-13
Altitude Display Mode 4-24, 4-25
Altitude minimums 2-18, 3-67, 5-15
Altitude select 1-17
Altitude trend vector 2-13
Sec 1
System
A
Foreword
Symbols
Annunciations 1-13, 2-15, 2-18, 4-19,
4-27, 4-28, 4-36, 4-38, 5-7, 6-1
Answering a phone call 3-64
Antenna 4-110
Approaches 2-29, 8-1, 5-3, 5-4, 5-10,
5-13,
Apt Dir 3-74
AP Test 2-3
APTSIGNS 2-5
Arc 4-7, 4-14
Arrivals 5-3, 5-4
Attitude 1-1, 1-4, 1-13, 2-8, 2-11, 6-8,
8-1
Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS) 1-4, 1-5, 1-13, 6-3
Attitude Hold (ATT) 1-12
Attitude Indicator 2-8, 2-9
Attitude Sync 2-37
ATT Sync 2-37
Aural message 4-20
Automatic flight following 3-56
Autopilot 1-1, 2-3
Autopilot (AP) 1-12
Auto-slewing 2-29
Auto zoom 3-9, 3-12
Aux mode 3-27
AUX - System Status Page 5-21
Aviation map data 3-22
B-1
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Brightness 1-23, 1-25, 3-27, 3-28,
C
Call suppression 3-58
Canadian Nexrad 4-57
Cautions iii, 3-5, 4-20, 3-37, 4-20,
CDI 1-17, 1-23, 2-2, 2-3, 2-21, 2-22,
2-24, 2-25, 2-26, 3-27, 2-29,
3-33, 3-34, 3-65,
CDI source 2-25, 2-29, 2-33
CDI/VDI Preview 1-23, 3-27
Cell movement 3-18, 3-19, 4-48, 4-75,
4-76
Channel 1-10, 3-40, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27,
5-29
Chart category 3-69, 5-8
Charts 3-75, 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-17
ChartView A-1, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, A-3, A-7,
ChartView database 5-3, 5-4, A-1, A-3
ChartView subscription A-3
City 3-5, 3-68, 3-72, 4-48
City forecast 4-48, 4-70, 4-71
Class B airspace 3-5, 3-23, 7-7
Class C airspace 3-5, 3-23, 7-7
Class D airspace 3-5, 3-23, 7-7
Cloud tops 4-48, 4-60, 4-61
Cloudy 4-49
Cold front 4-70
Color scheme 5-17
Combined NEXRAD 4-116
Compass card 2-21, 2-23
Continental US NEXRAD 4-114
CONUS 4-114
County warnings 4-48, 4-72
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 2-21,
2-22, 2-24
Course pointer 2-21, 2-22, 2-24, 2-29
Course select 1-17, 2-1, 2-26
Crossfill 3-33,
Cross track error 2-25
Current heading 1-17, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23
Current track indicator 2-21, 2-23
Cursor 1-19, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-18, 3-28,
3-30, 3-33, 3-72, 3-74, 7-7
B-2
Customizing maps 3-8
Customizing Nav Map pages 3-8
Cycle number 5-4, 5-5, 5-21
Cyclone 4-46, 4-48, 4-79
D
Database 1-5, 1-15, 3-10, 3-41, 4-4, 4-5,
4-66, 4-70, 4-103, 4-121, 5-3,
5-5, 6-16, A-1, A-5,
Databases A-1
Database SYNC 3-42
Data fields 3-66, 3-67
Data link 1-2, 1-10, 4-30, 4-44, 4-47,
4-51, 4-54, 4-59, 4-61, 4-62,
4-64, 4-66, 4-68, 4-69, 4-71,
4-72, 4-76, 4-80, 4-83, 4-94,
4-100, 4-105, 4-107, 4-112
Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 5-30
Date 1-23, 3-27, 3-35, , 5-4, 5-5, 6-16,
A-5,
Day view 5-17
DCLTR soft key 3-4, 5-18, 5-19
Dead Reckoning (DR) 2-33
Decision Height (DH) 3-65
Declutter 2-11, 3-4, 3-5, 4-23, 5-19
Departures 5-3, 5-4
Display brightness 1-23, 1-25, 3-27, 3-28,
Display units 1-24, 3-27, 3-36, 3-37,
3-38,
Distance 3-6, 1-23, 3-8, 3-12, 3-36, 3-65,
3-68,
Distance measuring 3-7
DME 7-1
DP 5-3, 5-4
Dual installation 3-33, 3-68, A-6,
E
Echo tops 4-48, 4-53, 4-58, 4-59, 4-60
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)
1-12
ETA 3-65
Expiration time 4-44, 4-47
Extreme attitude 2-11
Extreme Roll 2-12
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
I
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Icing 4-63, 4-81, 4-99, 4-100, 4-116,
4-118
Identifier 3-68, 3-69, 3-70, 3-72, 5-8,
5-10, 5-35
IFR 4-63, 4-100, 4-118
IGRF model 1-15
ILS 2-24, 2-27, 2-29, 2-30, 7-1
Imminent obstacle impact 4-13
Imminent terrain impact 4-13
INFO soft key 3-66
Infra-Red 4-97
Inhibit alerting 4-16
Intersection 3-5, 3-22, 3-23, 5-19, 7-1
Iridium 1-10, 3-54, 3-57, 4-1, 4-83
Iridium phone 3-57
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
J
Jeppesen 5-3, A-1
Jeppesen database A-3
Index
GAD 43 1-1, 1-2, 2-3, 6-8
GDC 72H/74H i, page ii, 1-2, 1-4
GDL 69/69A 1-2, 1-10, 3-18, 3-39, 3-40,
4-1, 5-1, 5-22, 5-24, 5-25, 5-30
GDL 69 troubleshooting 5-30
GDL 88H models 1-9
GDU 620 1-2, 1-3
GDU 1040 1-2
GEA 71 1-2
GFC 600H 1-12
GFDS
Glideslope 2-24, 2-27
Glossary 8-1
GMU 44 1-1, 1-2, 1-8
GPS altitude i, 4-4
GPS level of service 2-21, 2-24, 2-32
Ground pointer 2-1
Ground speed 2-7, 2-6, 5-34
GRS 77H/79H page ii, 1-2, 1-15
GSR 56 1-10, 3-54, 3-57
GTP 59 1-2
GTX 33 4-1
L
Land data 3-2, 3-9, 3-12, 3-13
Lateral deviation scale 2-21, 2-24
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
G
Sec 3
MFD
Hail 4-53
Hazard avoidance 4-1
Haze 4-49
Heading 1-5, 1-7, 1-17, 2-21, 2-22, 3-1,
3-34, 4-24, 4-30
Heading bug 1-17, 2-1, 2-21, 2-22
Heading select 1-17
Helipad 7-2
Heliport 7-1
Home page 3-3
Horizon heading 2-5, 5-32, 5-35
Horizon line 2-8, 2-9
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 1-3,
1-17, 2-1, 2-21–2-40, 5-35
Hot spots 5-18, 5-19
Hrzn Hdg 2-5
H-TAWS 4-12
Hurricanes 4-109
Sec 2
PFD
Facility 3-68, 3-71, 3-72
Field of view 3-10, 3-16, 5-39, 5-40
FIS-B 8-3
Flight Director (FD) 1-12
Flight path marker 5-34
Flight plan 1-23, 2-18, 2-27, 3-1, 3-2,
3-12, 3-65, 5-8
FliteCharts 5-4, A-5, 5-5, A-7,
FliteCharts database 5-4, A-7
Flood 4-49, 4-72
Fog 4-49
Forecast time 4-71
Forward looking terrain avoidance 4-13
Freezing level 4-48, 4-80
Frequency 2-22, 2-27, 2-29, 2-30, 2-32,
3-71, 3-73
Sec 1
System
H
Foreword
F
B-3
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Lat/Lon 3-5, 3-10, 3-16, 3-68
LDA 2-29
Legend 3-9, 3-19, 4-6, 4-45, 4-46, 4-49,
4-52, 4-56, 4-60, 4-68, 4-96,
4-106, 4-113, 4-123
Level 3-4, 1-23, 3-5, 3-27, 3-28, 4-80,
Lighting 1-25, 3-73,
Lightning 3-2, 3-5, 3-18, 3-19, 4-46,
4-48, 4-62, 4-66, 4-88, 4-98,
4-103, 4-121,
Limitations 4-5, 4-33, 4-53, 4-110
Localizer 2-22, 2-24, 2-29, 2-32
Loc BC 2-29
LPV 2-27, 2-33
LRU 1-3, 1-9, 3-41, 6-16,
Lubber line 2-21, 2-23
M
Magnetometer 1-2, 1-5, 1-8
Making a phone call 3-63
Map 3-2
Map orientation 3-1, 3-3, 3-11, 3-68, 4-6,
4-46, 4-54, 4-88, 4-94, 4-112
Map panning 3-6
Map pointer 3-2, 3-6
Map range 1-23, 3-2, 3-4, 3-11, 5-18
Map setup 3-8, 4-15, 5-40
Map symbols 7-1, 7-4, 7-6, 7-7
Map toolbar symbols 7-5
Marker beacon 2-35
Markings 2-8, 5-18, 5-19
Mean Sea Level 4-4
Measuring distance 3-7
Menu Key 1-19, 1-20, 3-4, 3-8
Menus 1-19, 1-20
Message 2-21, 4-20
METARs 3-65, 3-75, 4-46, 4-48, 4-66,
4-88, 4-103, 4-105, 4-121
MFD 1-1, 1-3, 1-16, 1-19, 3-1
MFD display units 3-27, 3-36,
Military 3-10, 3-24, 4-54
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) 2-18
Minimums 5-15
Miscellaneous symbols 7-6, 7-7
B-4
Miscompare 2-35
MOA 3-5, 3-10, 3-24, 7-7
Motion vector 4-41
Mountains 4-110
Moving map 1-1, 1-3, 1-19, 3-1, 3-2, 3-9
MSL 4-4
Mute 5-28
N
National Weather Service 4-51, 4-63,
4-72, 4-99, 4-116
Nav angle 2-22, 1-24, 3-37,
Navigation database 1-15, A-3, A-6
Navigation map 3-8, 1-19, 3-1, 3-2, 4-4,
4-15, 4-17, 4-44, 5-18, 5-19, 5-39
Navigation source ii, 2-3, 2-21, 2-25,
2-27, 2-32, 2-33, 3-34, 3-65
Nav range ring 3-2, 3-9
Nav Status Bar 2-1
Nav status style 3-27, 3-30
NDB 3-5, 3-9, 3-22, 3-23, , 5-19, 7-1
NEXRAD 3-18, 4-48, 4-51, 4-111
Legend 4-56, 4-113
Limitations 4-53
Viewing range 4-55, 4-112
NEXRAD Legend 3-19
Nexrad source 4-57
NEXRAD Viewing Range 3-19
Night view 5-17
Normal display operation 1-1
North up 3-1, 3-9, 3-11, 4-44, 4-46, 4-88
NOTAM 5-3, 5-16
Notes iv
NRST 5-8
O
OAT 1-4, 1-8
OBS 1-17, 2-21, 2-26, 2-33, 3-34, 8-5
Obstacle data 3-15, 4-4, A-5
Obstacles 3-12, 3-13, 3-15, 4-4, 4-5, 4-9,
4-35, A-5,
Obstructions 4-5
Occluded front 4-71
Other airspace 3-24
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
P
S
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
B-5
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
Sec 5
Additional
Features
SafeTaxi 3-12, 3-22, 5-1, 5-18, 5-19,
5-21, A-1, A-5, A-7
SafeTaxi symbols 7-2
Satellite telephone 3-57
Scale 3-4, 3-6, 2-6, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10, 2-21,
2-22, 2-24, 3-2, 4-9, 3-10, 3-14,
4-26, 2-13,
Scroll bars 5-12
SDF 2-29
Secure Digital (SD) card 2-1, 3-1, A-1
Selected Altitude 2-15, 2-18, 3-34, 4-106,
4-123, 2-13
Selected altitude range arc 3-17
Selected Course 2-26, 3-34
Selected Heading 2-22, 3-34
Serial numbers 3-41, 5-30, 6-16
Service Class 5-23, 5-24
SIGMET 4-48, 4-63, 4-64, 4-99, 4-100,
4-116, 4-117
SiriusXM 3-39, 3-40
SiriusXM Satellite Radio 1-10
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment
5-22
SiriusXM weather 3-66
Sky pointer 2-9, 2-10
Sky representation 2-8, 5-41
Slewing 2-29
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 3
MFD
Radar 4-33, 4-35, 4-51, 4-53, 4-58,
4-109, 4-110
Radar altimeter 3-28, 2-38, 2-13
Rainy 4-49
Range keys 1-19, 3-4, 3-68, 5-12
Range ring 3-2, 3-9, 4-25, 4-39,
RECENT 5-8
Record of Revisions vi
Reduce protection 4-17
Sec 2
PFD
R
Sec 1
System
Page group 1-19, 3-2
Page menus 1-19, 1-20, 1-21, 3-8, 3-10,
3-18, 3-21, 3-22, 3-28, 3-66, 4-7,
4-14, 4-45, 4-46
Panning 3-6, 5-12, 5-19
Parallel track 7-7
Parking area 7-2
Part Sun 4-49
PFD 1-3, 1-16
PFD options 1-23, 3-27, 3-30,
PFD soft keys 2-2
Phone book 3-59
Phone call 3-63
Phone volume 3-62
Photocell 1-25
Pilot Controlled Lighting 3-73
PIREP 4-65, 4-101, 4-119
Pitch indication 2-8
Pitch scale 2-8, 2-9, 5-33
Position reporting 3-54
Power 4-110
Power-up 1-4, 1-14, 1-15, 4-36, 5-4, 5-5,
5-21, A-3, A-7
Precipitation 4-53, 4-58, 4-66, 4-95,
4-103, 4-121
Preset 5-29
Product age 4-44, 4-47
Proximate advisory 7-2
Reference speed 2-8
Reflectivity 4-52, 4-53, 4-110
Regional NEXRAD 4-115
Register with GFDS 4-84
Restore defaults 3-28, 3-67
Restricted airspace 3-24
Roll pointer 2-8, 2-9
Roll Scale 2-8, 2-9
Roll scale pointer 2-1, 2-9
Roll Scale Zero 2-8
Route 3-7, 3-65, 5-19
RP mode 4-17
Runway depiction 5-36
Runway extension 3-22
Runway information 3-71, 3-73
Foreword
Outside air temperature 1-4, 1-8, 2-1
Overspeed 2-7
Overview 1-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Slip/Skid Indicator 2-8
Smart airspace 3-25
Snow 4-49, 4-53
Soft keys 1-16, 1-20, 2-1, 2-2, 2-11, 3-1,
4-23, 4-36, 5-26, 5-32, 5-34
Software version 3-41, 5-30, 6-16
Speed 1-4, 2-6, 1-23, 2-8, 3-12, 2-20,
3-27, 3-29, 4-32, 3-36
Speed range 2-8
STAR 5-3, 5-4
Stationary front 4-71
Stormscope 1-9, 4-126
Sunny 4-49
Surface analysis 4-48, 4-70
Surface data 4-46, 4-71
Surface winds 4-63, 4-100, 4-118
Symbols 4-26, 4-32, 4-47, 4-49, 5-37, 7-1
Synchronization 1-23, 3-27, 3-33, 3-34
Syn Terr 2-5
Synthetic Vision v, 2-5, 3-10, 3-16, 4-2,
4-13, 4-19, 5-1, 5-31
Synthetic Vision alerts 4-19
Syn Vis 2-5
System description 1-1
System display units 3-27, 3-37,
System power 1-4, 1-13, 1-15
System settings 1-22, 3-27
System status 3-41, 4-5, 4-9, 6-16, 4-27,
4-36,
T
TACAN 7-1
TAF 3-75, 4-66, 4-103, 4-121
TAS 4-23, 5-1
TAWS alerts 4-12
TAWS-SVT 4-1, 4-13
TCA 3-9, 3-23
Temperature 1-24, 3-37, 4-49,
Temperature probe 1-1, 1-2, 1-8
Temperature reference 3-27
Terrain 1-23, 3-12, 3-1, 4-2, 3-13, A-1,
4-4, 4-10, 4-13, 4-35,
Terrain alerts 4-4, 4-13, 4-19, 4-20
Terrain data 3-10, 3-14, A-5, 4-5, 4-9,
B-6
Terrain proximity i, 1-23, 4-1, 4-4, 7-5
Terrain-SVT 4-2, iii, 4-13,
Textual METARs 4-67, 4-104, 4-122
TFR 3-3, 3-10, 3-22, 3-24, 4-73, 4-108,
4-124, 7-7
Thunderstorm 4-109
Thunderstorms 4-49, 4-72
Time 3-12, 1-23, 3-27, 3-35, 4-44, 4-48,
4-70, 4-71,
Time zone 3-35
TIS 4-23, 4-30, 4-32, 4-33, 4-35, 5-1
TMA 3-9, 3-23
To/From Indicator 2-21, 2-22
Topo data 3-10, 3-13
Topo scale 3-3, 3-10, 3-14
Tornadoes 4-49, 4-72
Tornados 4-109
Track indicator 2-21, 2-23
Track vector 3-2, 3-9, 3-12, 4-34
Traffic Advisory 3-21, 4-1, 4-23, 4-26,
4-30, 7-2
Traffic Pop-Up 4-29
Traffic symbols 4-32, 4-40, 5-37, 7-2
Transponder 4-1, 4-23, 4-30, 4-33, 4-35,
4-36,
Trend Vector 2-6, 2-13, 2-21, 2-23
Trim ball indicator 2-9
True Airspeed 2-7, 1-23,
True North 2-22, 3-37
Turbulence 4-63, 4-82, 4-99, 4-116
Turn Rate 2-21
Turn Rate Indicator 2-21, 2-23
U
Under construction 7-2
Unusual attitude 2-11, 5-41
V
VDI 2-27, 5-34
Vector Duration 4-43
Vector motion 4-41
Version 1-14, 3-41, 4-13, 5-21, A-6
Vertical deviation 2-27
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
X
XM 4-44
XM Information page 3-39
XM weather 4-44
XTK 2-25
Foreword
Y
Sec 1
System
Yaw Axis Control 1-12
Z
Sec 2
PFD
Zero pitch line 5-34
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical speed 1-1, 1-4, 1-18, 2-20, 1-24,
2-1, 3-27, 3-34, 3-36, 2-13,
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 1-24, 2-20
Video 3-49
VNAV 2-14, 2-27, 2-33
VNAV Altitude Constraints 2-14, 2-16
VNV 8-7
Voice alert 4-35
Volume 1-10, 3-40, 5-25, 5-28
VOR 1-17, 2-3, 3-5, 2-22, 2-25, 2-32,
3-1, 3-9, 3-22, 3-23, 3-34, 5-19,
7-1
VORTAC 7-1
Vspeeds 2-8
W
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WAAS 1-8, 2-27
Warm front 4-70, 4-71
Warnings i
Waypoint information 3-68, 3-71, 3-75,
5-19
Waypoint selection 3-69
Waypoint weather 3-75
Weather 3-18, 3-75, 4-44, 4-83, 4-109
Weather legend 4-45, 4-49, 4-52
Weather product 3-19, 4-44, 4-47, 4-49,
4-55, 4-95, 4-112, 5-23
Weather radar 1-2
Weather symbols 4-47
Wind 1-23, 2-34, 3-9, 3-2, 3-12, 3-27,
3-30, 3-42, 4-48, 4-49, 4-63,
4-66, 4-68, 4-100, 4-103, 4-106,
4-118, 4-121, 4-123,
Winds aloft 4-48, 4-68, 4-106, 4-123
Wind speed 3-12
Wind vector 1-23, 2-34, 3-3, 3-9, 3-12,
3-27, 3-30, 7-7
WX-500 1-9, 4-126
WX soft key 3-66
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
B-7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
B-8
Garmin G500H Pilot’s Guide
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
190-01150-02 Rev. M
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising